Home

Kidde 1276CA Smoke Alarm User Manual

1. Layout Adjustment has the following setting that can be adjusted Original Orientation and Original Size Filing Options has the following setting that can be adjusted Delay Start 6 Tochange any feature settings within each setting area click on the Edit button select the feature to be changed and click on the Save button to return to the Server Fax Defaults screen At the Device 7 Select the Fax button from the touch screen then touch OK 8 Enter a valid fax number Press Add then Close 9 Load a document in the document handler and press the green start button 10 Verify that your fax is received at the specified fax device System Administrator Guide 23 7 Server Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 23 8 System Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow Scanning If you are experiencing problems with Workflow Scanning first verify that the device is connected on the network and functioning as a printer by performing the following activities e Check the network cable at the back of the device e Senda test print from your PC to the device e If connected via TCP IP try a PING from your workstation to the device Is the device functioning on the network as a printer Configure your device on the network or resolve any networking issues before attempting to use the Workflow Scanning feature For instructions to configure the device on the network see Enable TCP IP and HTTP at
2. Configuring Public and Internal Address Books LDAP The device supports two types of address book e Internal A global address book provided by LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol services e Public An address book created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV file comma separated values file Both address book types can be configured for use on the device at the same time Addressing Internal Address Book LDAP Note LDAP support is only available on the device Configuration of the LDAP directory settings requires the network to support LDAP services For LDAP Addressing see LDAP Addressing on page 13 6 For Public Address book see Create a Public Address Book on page 13 9 System Administrator Guide 13 5 E mail ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 LDAP Addressing LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a popular protocol used by large accounts to access large quantities of data including corporate address books The local system will need to know where the LDAP server is located on the network and may need a login name and password if the LDAP server is not configured to allow NULL names and passwords The Internet Services LDAP page enables you to configure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol information LDAP is used for the following activities gt Toaccessthe corporate address book to locate e mail addresses for use with the E mail and Internet Fax services e To authenticate
3. TIFF Each scanned original is converted into one TIFF image file All of these files will be stored in a directory foldername xsm Multi Page TIFF A single TIFF file will be created containing all the pages of the document JPEG Creates standard JPEG File Interchange Format jpg documents with one image per file PDF Portable Document Format The PDF image format is a multipage TIFF image enclosed within a PDF wrapper 12 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes File Once a scan filing destination has been configured from within the File Repository Setup section of Internet Services it can be added to the Default Template To Add a New Filing Destination 1 Click on the Add button next to the File Destinations section 2 Select the required Filing Policy from the drop down menu 3 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Fax Destinations Note This option will only be available if the Server Fax option is installed on the device and Fax was selected as a Destination Service Select Destination Services and check the Fax box Click on the Add button to add a new Fax destination Enter the required fax number in the Add Fax Number box within the Fax Recipients section Click on the Add button Delayed Send can be selected in the Delivery box in Fax Distribution List if you want to send the fax at a specific time o9 oW Ov UT ER 9 Click on the Apply button to accept the
4. 3 Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab 3 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Qo ii gy cum Es Touch Device Settings Touch Configuration Information Pages Touch the No button under Print Configuration at Power On Touch Save Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Configure Print Protocols 1 eno p ge po OND 11 12 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter At the welcome page click on the Configure Device button If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button If you want to use the checklist click on the View Checklist button and click on the Print button Scroll to the bottom of the screen and click on the Close button Click on the Settings button next to Print Protocols Click on the Configure button next to General Settings to configure general print settings Click on the Save button when you have finished configuring general settings Click on the Configure button next to the IP Internet Protocol to enable on the device to support your network environment Enter the information for your chosen protocol If you need more information on how to configure protocol information refer to Network Installation on page 5 1 Clic
5. 9 From the Action drop down list select how you wish IP Filtering to handle the incoming packet 10 From the Move This Rule To drop down list select either End of List or Beginning of List for the location of this rule Note that rule order is important in IP Filtering because rules can negate each other if placed in an incorrect order 11 Enter the Source IP Address to which this rule will apply 12 Enter a number for the Source IP Mask to which this rule will apply The allowable range of 0 to 32 corresponds to the 32 bit binary number comprising IP addresses A number of 8 for example represents a Class A address mask of 255 0 0 0 The number 16 represents a Class B address mask of 255 255 0 0 The number 24 represents a Class C address mask of 255 255 255 0 13 Source Port This selection is only available when the Protocol has been set to TCP Enter the originating port if applicable that the rule has been created to handle If the incoming packet did not originate from this source port the rule will not be applied 14 Destination Port This selection is only available when the protocol is set to TCP or UDP Enter the destination port that the rule has been created to handle If the incoming packet was not sent to this port the rule will not be applied 15 ICMP Message This selection is only available when the protocol is set to ICMP Select which ICMP Message the rule is meant to handle 16 Clic
6. Click on the Services link Click on the Server Fax link Select Fax Repository Setup in the directory tree Select FTP from the Protocol drop down menu Select either IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the FTP location Type in the path to the location of the fax repository in Document Path Enter the full path to the directory starting at the root of FTP services For example directory name directory name In the Login Credentials to Access the Destination area select either Authenticated User or System enter the user account and password in the Login Name and Password entry boxes Select System to have the system log into the server or Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine access Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Configure General Settings T 2 Select Defaults in the directory tree To print a Confirmation Sheet after every Server Fax job click on the Edit button in the General section then select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the success or failure of the Server Fax job If the fax is successful the location of the document on the fax server is also specified Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log is filed in the fax repository with the fax job Click on the Apply button to accept changes and retu
7. Fax Mailbox contents If fax card is installed This will take approximately 20 minutes The overwrite process cannot be cancelled and the device will remain offline until it is completed e Full Image Overwrite will delete all image data from memory and hard disk s Data to be Deleted INCLUDES Jobs and folders stored in the Reprint Saved Jobs feature Jobs stored in the Scan to Mailbox feature if installed Fax Dial Directories If fax card is installed Fax Mailbox contents If fax card is installed This will take approximately 60 minutes The overwrite process cannot be cancelled and the device will remain offline until it is completed Click on the OK button The overwrite will commence The device will be taken offline and will be unable to receive any incoming jobs Any existing jobs in the queue will be deleted Following completion of the Overwrite the On Demand Overwrite completion screen appears Touch Close The network controller will reboot and network functionality will be unavailable for several minutes Once rebooted the Disk Overwrite confirmation report will print This details the status and time of the overwrite To verify the overwrite has completed view the Confirmation Sheet under Confirmation Details The Job Information Status ESS Disk should read SUCCESS Schedule a Daily Overwrite A TCP IP network connected device can be set to overwrite image data on a daily basis To schedule a
8. The Welcome to the Installer dialog box appears Click Continue 9 Click Continue and then Agree to accept the License Agreement 10 Select the required disk if necessary where you want to install the printer Click Continue 11 Click Install 12 Click Close 13 Restart your computer 14 When your computer has restarted open Print Centre To do this 15 Double click the hard drive icon on the desktop 16 Double click to open Applications 17 Double click to open Utilities 18 Double click to open Print Center 19 Double click Add to add a new printer 20 Select IP Printing from the menu 21 Enter the IP address of the printer 22 Select Xerox from the printer model list 23 Select Xerox ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 according to your model from the model name list 24 Click Add 25 Print a document from an application to verify that the printer is installed correctly View the Macintosh Printer Utility on the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD CentreWare is a suite of applications used for installing maintaining and using the Xerox devices CentreWare Macintosh Printer Utility is a CentreWare application that enables network administrators to rename and rezone Xerox systems that are configured for AppleTalk connectivity Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device and follow the instructions contained in the CentreW
9. 7 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 8 Click on the Login button 9 Click on the Services link 10 Click on the E mail link 11 Select Public Address Book in the directory tree 12 Click on the Browse button and browse to the location of the Address Book File CSV created step 3 above 13 Highlight the CSV file and click Open in the Choose File window 14 Click on the Import Now button in the web browser If an address book is already in existence you will be warned that the new import will overwrite the existing address book 15 Or you can use the Map Existing Address Book button to map to an existing Address Book 16 Click on the OK button to import the Address Book 17 Click on the Apply button Note If an address book is already established you may be warned that duplicate entries exist and the new entries will be ignored At the Device 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Select the E mail button then touch OK Touch Address Book Touch Public in the Address Books drop down list Enter the name of the recipient of your e mail Touch Search The public address book appears Select the required name from the list Touch the To button System Administrator Guide 13 9 E mail ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 25 Touch Close 26 Place a document to e mail in the document handler and press the green start button 27 Veri
10. 9201 9202 9203 Device Authentication If using a SMARTsend server a valid Windows account must be created on the SMARTsend Server for the device s authentication The account enables each device to communicate with the SMARTsend server to exchange template information and other configuration data For account creation instructions refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend Installation and Administration Guide Template Considerations when using SMARTsend A single Xerox device cannot use both CentreWare Workflow Scanning services and SMARTsend If legacy CentreWare Workflow Scanning Services templates need to be utilized within SMARTsend use the SMARTsend Template Importer to import the desired templates as stated in the FreeFlow SMARTsend Installation and Administration Guide Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional This is required to access Internet Services to configure Workflow Scanning The Internet Services function is accessed through the embedded HTTP server on the device and allows System Administrators to configure scan settings by using an Internet browser Configure a Scan Filing Location Scanning with the device is accomplished through user selection of templates on the device that
11. At the Device 1 Touch the Internet Fax button 2 Enterthe Internet Fax address of the device the E mail address configured within Internet Services 3 Touch the Add button then touch Close Place a document in the document handler and press the green start button The document should be received as an Internet Fax job If it is not check the POP3 server address details to make sure they have been properly configured within Internet Services Check the operation of the device s SMTP and POP 3 account as follows 1 On a network connected workstation set up e mail using the same SMTP and POP 3 server and account with passwords as the device 2 Sendan e mail to yourself 3 Ifthe e mail arrives at your e mail in box you have proven that the device s account for both the SMTP and POP3 server s is valid 4 If there is still a problem check for restricted host addresses at the SMTP server that could cause mail to not be received from the device Other possibilities are that an authentication server is interfering with the device s log in to the mail server or that the mail client on the device is not working correctly By successfully sending e mail to a mail server not subject to authentication the possibility of a malfunctioning client can be eliminated If the fault requires further investigation refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support 24 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203
12. Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Configuration in the directory tree 2 Scroll down to the Software Versions area and view the System Software version To Clone a Device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 3 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Cloning in the directory tree um ops From the Create Clone File area check to boxes next to the feature to select the settings that you wish to clone To clone all features click on the Select All button or to customize the configuration file disable any of the features by clicking the checkboxes next to the feature s and then click on the Clone button 8 Inthe Cloning Instructions area right click on the Cloning dlm link that appears and select Save Target As 9 Adialog box will prompt you to specify a name and location for the cloned file Ensure the extension reads dlm 10 Click Save The dlm file can now be used to clone other devices To I
13. Note Enter the HTTP path of public dce xeroxvalidation convauth and port number of 1824 to facilitate communication 19 If you are using the Network Accounting feature the Xerox device can be set to automatically obtain accounting data for the user from the Authentication server when the user authenticates This reduces the number of screens that the user is presented with when they login at the device To implement this feature select Automatically apply Accounting Codes from the server If you want the user to provide accounting data manually at the user interface select User must manually enter accounting codes at the device System Administrator Guide 21 3 Xerox Secure Access ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 20 If you require users to use a Xerox Secure Access device to log in for example a card reader select Restricted access via Xerox Secure Access Device If you want to allow users to enter their login details on the screen keyboard select Enable alternate access via on screen keyboard 21 In the Device Instructional Blocking Window area enter text in the Window Title field to define a title that will display on the Xerox device screen 22 Enter text in the Instructional Text field to define a prompt that will show on the Xerox device screen to tell the user what they need to do to be authenticated at the device Note If the Title and Prompt have been configured on the Xerox Partner authentication server t
14. This web user interface will be disabled until TCP IP is re enabled from the local user interface IPv6 Note IPv6 is optional It may be used in addition to or in place of IPv4 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Note TCP IP and HTTP should have been initially configured refer to Enable TCP TP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 of this guide 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Connectivity link 6 Click on the Protocols link 7 Select IP Internet Protocol in the directory tree 8 Ensure that IPv6 is selected 5 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 9 Checkthe Enable box for Protocol to enable the TCP IP protocol Note If you do not check the Protocol Enabled box you will not be able to access Internet Services TCP IP must then be enabled from the device s user interface 10 The Host Name is populated when configured at the IPv4 screen If you change the Host Name here it will also change it for IPv4 11 Enter the required Domain Name 12 Stateless Addresses The Link Local Address is automatically populated a Check the Enable box for Use Router Supplied Prefixes if router advertisements are used 13 Default DHCP Dynamic Host Co
15. Write down the user Account and Password details Test the FTP connection by logging into the Scan Repository directory from a PC with the user account and password e Create a new folder within the directory e Delete the folder Enter the Scan Repository Details via Internet Services 1 9 94 5 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 At your workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select File Repository Setup in the directory tree Click on the Add New button in the File Repository Setup area or the Edit button If the default File Repository has been set Note During device configuration SMARTsend if used overwrites the Default Repository and Template Pool scan settings If certain applications will use Default Repository settings not matching SMARTsend settings reconfigure the applications to use an Alternate Repository before configuring the device with SMARTsend s Add Update feature Enter a name to describe the filing destination template in the Friendly Name entry box Select FTP from the Protocol drop down menu Select either the IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radi
16. 13 Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Server Fax link Select Fax Repository Setup in the directory tree Select HTTP or HTTPS from the Protocol drop down menu Select IP Address or Host Name and enter IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the computer where the fax filing repository HTTP or HTTPS server is located Enter the Script Path and file name from HTTP root Click on the Get Example Scripts link for further information Enter the path to the scan repository in the Document Path box Enter the Login Name and Password for the fax repository Also select System to have the system log into the server or Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine access Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Configure General Settings 1 2 Click Defaults in the directory tree To print a Confirmation Sheet after every Server Fax job click on the Edit button in the General section then select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the success or failure of the Server Fax job If the fax is successful the location of the document on the fax server is also specified Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log is filed in
17. Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Apply Factory Defaults Settings To restore the Default Template to its original settings click on the Apply Factory Default Settings button Note This will delete any custom settings applied to the Default Template 10 14 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning Set up Remote Template Pool Repository 1 Oo 4 Qv Ut BS CJ IN 13 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Click on the Advanced link Select Template Pool Setup in the directory tree For Protocol use the drop down menu to select the protocol you will be using to communicate with the template pool server Select either the IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button Enter the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the FTP location Type in the path to the location of the scan folder in Document Path Enter the full path to the directory starting at the root of FTP services For example directory name directory name Select a radio button for Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select System to have the system direc
18. Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select 802 1X in the directory tree 9v uv e MSN 7 14 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 7 Checkthe Enable 802 1X box 8 Select the required EAP type from the Authentication Method drop down menu 9 Enterthe User Name Device Name and Password required by your authentication switch and server 10 Click on the Apply button 11 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 12 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Xerox Secure Access Xerox Secure Access enables customers to leverage Xerox Partner Solutions to provide user authentication with an optional card reader Users can access the features available at the device once they have been authenticated System Administrators can configure the device so that users must be authenticated and authorized before they can access specific services or areas Xerox Secure Access provides a means of authenticating users via an authentication server and optional card reader Secure Access and Accounting Secure Access can be enabled with the Network Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting features for accounting purposes When Network Accounting is enabled the device can be configured to automatically obtain accounting data fro
19. Enable WSD Web Services for Devices 1 Oo ON OY Ur Gg At your workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the WSD Web Services for Devices in the directory tree In the WSD Services area check the Enabled box to enable the services In the WSD Services Selection area check individual services box you want to enable Click on the Apply button 18 2 System Administrator Guide Xerox Standard Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting XSA is a free feature of the device When enabled XSA tracks the numbers of Copy Print Workflow Scanning E mail Server Fax Internet Fax and Embedded Fax jobs when these features are installed on the device for each user Usage limits can also be applied to users to restrict the total numbers of copy print fax and scan jobs that a user can perform Administrators can print a report which contains all XSA data XSA is set up through Internet Services the device s HTTP pages displayed on your web browser Administrators must create accounts and specify limits before users are authorized to access the device When XSA is set up users must enter their account details at the device to use the device When they have finished
20. Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 3 18 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Configuration Report in the directory tree scroll down to the Common User Data section to see your System Software Version Contact your Xerox Customer Support Representative to make certain that Auto Upgrading is appropriate for your device If it is not refer to the Software Upgrade via Network Connection topic for manual upgrade instructions Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Set the Auto Upgrade Time 1 MOON Set por S 12 13 14 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Select Auto Upgrade in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable the Auto Upgrade feature Select either Hourly or Daily to activate the feature accordingly in the Refresh Start Time section If Daily has been selected enter the required time for the upgrade to be performed If
21. Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Windows 2000 2003 Server Xerox Printer Installer This section provides instructions on how to install printer drivers manually However you can use Xerox Printer Installer to discover the printer and install drivers To use the Xerox Printer Installer locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM delivered with your device and follow the instructions contained in the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Microsoft Windows Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Verify the device is configured with the correct IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address information by printing a Configuration Report To print a Configuration Report go to the Device Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages anga Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close e Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD This was delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device Review any README file contained with the printer drivers Windows Add Printer Wizard At the Desktop right click the Network Neighborhood icon Select Properties Click on the Protocols tab Verify that the TCP IP protocol has been loaded Select the Services tab and verify that Microsoft TCP IP Printing is l
22. The Power On button is located at the left side of the device The Welcome Page and Installation Wizards An Installation Wizard displays the first time the device is powered on providing the ability to set the date and time Simultaneously a Welcome Page is enabled as the opening page of the device s Internet Services web pages You can click Configure Device on this Welcome Page or click the Configuration Overview link on the Properties tab to go directly to the Install Wizards for configuring protocols and optional services A I Have a Cloning File button on the Welcome Page lets you copy configuration settings from a compatible Xerox system and apply them to this system To stop displaying the Welcome Page check the Don t Show Welcome Page Again box System Administrator Guide 2 3 Device Connection ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 To access the Welcome Page or Properties tab of Internet Services TCP IP and HTTP must be enabled on the device as described in the Introduction on page 1 1 of this guide Complete the Installation Wizard If this is the first time the device has been powered on the Installation Wizard will run If this screen does not appear proceed to Network Connectivity in this chapter 1 At the Installation Wizard screen touch Next 2 Verify the Customer Support Telephone number or input the correct entry by touching the box and entering the number by pressing the numbers on the keypad Touch Nex
23. View template details on the monitor Press the Start button to scan the document Check the scan folder on your file server to verify the image was filed The Next Step is to proceed to the General Settings see Optional Step Configure General Settings on page 10 10 NetWare NCP NetWare Core Protocol Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to installation Ensure the NetWare protocol is enabled on your device How to check that the NetWare protocol is enabled on your device Print a Configuration Report to verify that NetWare protocol is enabled on your device a Press the lt Machine Status gt button b Touch the Machine Information tab c Touch Information Pages d Touch Configuration Report 10 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning e Touch Print then touch Close The Configuration Report will print Verify the NetWare settings configured under Network Setup NetWare should read Enabled For instructions on how to enable NetWare refer to the NetWare topic in the Protocol section of this guide Designate or create a new directory on the NetWare server to be used as the scan filing location repository Note the server name server volume directory path the NDS Context and Tree if applicable Crea
24. and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Accounting link Click on the Xerox Standard Accounting link Select Manage Accounting in the directory tree Click on the Enable Accounting button click on the OK button when Properties have been successfully modified pop up message appears Continue on to the next steps to create a new group account Create a Group Account 8 9 10 11 Select Group Account in the directory tree to create a new group account In the Group Accounts area enter an ID in the Account ID box for the new group account for example 001 The Group Account can be numeric values up to a maximum of 12 digits Group Account ID s must be unique Enter a name for the group account in the Account Name box for example Xerox The group name can be alphanumeric characters to a maximum of 32 characters The Group Account name must be unique Click on the Add Account box click on the OK button to confirm the account has been added The account will appear in the Group Accounts list Continue on to the next steps to create a new user Create a User Account and Set Usage Limits 12 13 14 15 16 Note A group account must be created before you create user accounts Click the Xerox Standard Accounting link in the Internet Se
25. button Click on Folders in the directory tree The Folders screen allows administrators to change folder passwords delete folders or delete scanned images within folders Dialog controls are self explanatory Click on Scan Policies in the directory tree The Scan Policies screen allows administrators to set requirements for the use of passwords or folders Check the required option Allow scanning to Default Public Folder enable users to scan to the default Scan to Mailbox folder Require per job password for public folders ensure users are required to enter a password at the device each time they scan to a public folder Allow additional folders to be created allow users to create new folders Require password when creating additional folders to create Private Folders which require users to enter a password when they create a new folder Prompt for password when scanning to private folder ensure users must enter a password at the device each time they scan to a Private Folder Allow access to job log data file to be able to print the job log for specific scanned documents The job log contains information about the scanned document Third party applications can be used to search file and distribute jobs based on their job log information The job log can only be accessed for PDF or Multi Page Tiff images Click on the Apply button When finished working with the dialogs click on the a
26. herbe RE e Ret eI E EURO UR ENDO TeETS 3 12 Billing Information and Usage Counters 4 exer nre mr Xen Recens 3 13 Banner Sheet a sacccsaneva 3 13 3 13 Enabling the feature at a TCP IP Networked Workstation 3 13 Online 0 siehe e o rale ipe dh bed a dene dut 3 14 Auxiliary Foreign Device Interface Kit 0 0 eee cece eee eee eee 3 15 SNMP Simple Network Management 050601 3 15 Software Upgrade via Network Connection pp 3 17 Prepare forthe Upgrade pp 3 17 WSS PAPE 3 17 Manual Upgrade exec e Xx eg ERE RR ERR OUR setae 3 18 3 18 Set the Auto Upgrade Time 2 02 0 ccc cece ccc cece eee 3 19 CentreWare Internet 9ervices 4 1 4 1 SS 4 2 Description and Alerts 4 4 2 Billing Information and Usage Counters pp 4 3 Corisumables spidsen eE E OR SERA E EE e dake en pees 4 3 TOYS p 4 4 ii v 4 4 Active Jobs 4 4 Saved JODS s cs enema nen pu te gto RI DR NH DERE RON RT RUE A a s 4 5 dme nerone o ae e Ea T EEA E O TEE EEE EEE 4 5 PrODeTLIeS nuce acted eati 4 6 Configuration Overview 4 4 6 Beier m 4 6 General Setup isses een 4 7 4 7 On 4 7 Image Settings esed esiex 5 PIRA ted tanae AO EEE 4 8 Internationalizati or oss centec n eter Spa IIERL Ric Gu eee GE 4 9 Extensible Service Setup sorire iiien ire ee a ere e ee E X PRU 4 10 4 10 Low Supply Warning pp 4 12
27. link Click on the Custom Services link Select Validation Options in the directory tree co W JG 0 NJ To have the user name sent with the validation request if the user is authenticated at the device user interface click the Include User Name with validation request checkbox 9 Clickthe Apply button WSD Web Services for Devices Web Services for Devices specifies a lightweight subset of the overall web services protocol suite that is appropriate for network connected devices The Devices Profile prescribes how to use elements of core web services specifications to enable these functions Web Service on Devices API WSDAPI is an implementation of the Devices Profile for Web Services DPWS for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 The DPWS constrains web services specifications so clients can easily discover devices Once a device is discovered a client can retrieve a description of services hosted on that device and use those services e Send more secure messages to and from a web service e Dynamically discover a web service System Administrator Guide 18 1 Custom Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 e Describe a web service Subscribe to and receive events from a web service Vista only operating system provides Web Services on devices as a connection protocol with printing and scanning peripherals Web Services technology provides a common framework for describing and sharing information
28. 14 Active Jobs 4 4 Admin Password 8 3 Administrator Access 2 4 Administrator Tools Password 3 1 Alert Notification 4 10 Alert Notification 3 11 Alesrt Notification Local UI Alerts 3 12 Apple Macintosh TCP IP 5 23 AppleTalk on Windows NT 5 12 AS400 Printing using LPR CRTOUTQ 5 29 AS400 Raw TCP IP Printing 5 28 Audit Log file 8 6 Audit Log File completion status 8 7 entry data 8 8 event description 8 7 event ID 8 6 identify PC or User 8 7 IIO status 8 7 Audit Log 8 5 Authentication 7 1 Authentication Configuration 7 3 Authentication Configuration for NDS Novell 7 5 Authentication Configuration Wizard 7 2 Authentication Overview 7 1 Authorization Overview 7 1 Auxiliary Foreign Device Interface Kit 3 15 System Administrator Guide B Backup Saved Jobs 3 14 Banner Sheet 3 13 Billing and Counters 4 3 Billing Information 3 13 Billing Meter Read 3 12 Bindery Settings 5 26 BOOTP 5 4 E CentreWare Internet Services 2 6 CentreWare Internet Services CWIS 4 1 Access CWIS 4 2 Alerts 4 2 Rebooting the machine 4 3 Support 4 12 CentreWare Internet Services 5 14 Cloning 3 4 4 7 Completion Status 8 7 Compression Capability 10 14 Configuration 4 7 Configuration Overview 4 6 Configuration Page 3 2 Configuration Report 2 4 Configuration Report 3 2 Configure static addressing 5 2 workflow scanning general settings 10 10 Configure 802 1X with Internet Services 7 14
29. 2 Enterthe IP Address of a Primary WINS server and port 3 Enterthe IP Address of a Secondary WINS server and port Note If DHCP is configured WINS IP Address es will be overridden 4 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values 5 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device 5 20 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 6 Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 7 Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time System Administrator Guide 5 21 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Apple Talk Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e An existing operational AppleTalk network with Macintosh workstation computers equipped with Ethernet network interface cards e The AppleTalk Name you wish to assign to your printer e The AppleTalk Zone if used in which your printer will reside e Ethernet Cable e The CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD delivered with your device Review any README file contained with
30. 4 Ov wr B t m The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication 9 Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Remotely on the Network from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization Ensure that the Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP checkbox under Personalization is checked and click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page 10 In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Authentication Server 11 In the Authentication Server page select SMB Windows 2000 2003 or SMB Windows NT4 from the Authentication Type drop down menu 12 In the Configuration Required area enter details in the Default Domain field 13 Check the Optional Information box 14 Select either IPv4 Address or Host Name radio button 15 If IPv4 Address is selected enter the IP Address and Port details in the required fields 16 If Host Name is selected enter the Host Name and Port details in the required fields 17 In the Alternate Domains Optional area enter details for up to 8 Alternate Domains Optional if required 18 Click on the Save button to save the settings and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 19 In the Current Configuration
31. 6 CentreWare Internet Services 5 22 2 6 System COnniQurauon serere ede reo v nye dace Ip UM b ees 2 6 Access Internet Services sack scs cis e t IE eoi cix e de VIN neben ed 2 6 Setup 0 28 Configure Protocols with Internet Services pp 2 9 3 General SODUD sa edat oa we td dI RD PERF PEE CETERIS 3 1 Administrator Tools 3 1 How to change the Administrator Password pp 3 1 Configuration PAGG c1 tcc et hie et alk Soe ee DEUS 3 2 How to Print a Configuration Report pp 3 2 Configure Print Protocols 0 3 3 Configure Services ccc cece enn nen esee e eee 3 3 CONN ceo PM SRM LC LU ILLND 3 4 To Verify the Software Version 0 3 4 To Clone a Device ssssssssssssssssee I 3 4 To Install the Clone File on Another Device 4 3 5 Image Settilgs csi success aree eT rer a b Tes pre a wed wae 3 5 Accessing Image Settings including Linearized PDF and XPS 3 5 08 3 8 System Administrator Guide iii ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 JOD DELETION estan 3 8 Extensible Service Set p 2 3 9 SMart eSOlUtloris usi seonserzev keen e Pu pRRG REB SRISSERGCUNEN UR eds 3 9 Information Checklist 0 0 0 0 cc ccc ccc eee nnn e 3 9 Energy Saver audes eee soie Bhan ace ra ie Kee wha aunt eb deals ad ee dees 3 10 3 11 To Set up an Alert Notification Group s siad x ada dace qnia 3 11 To Assign Notification Alerts to a Group pp 3 11 To Edit or Delete a Recipient Address 0 3 11 e 3 12 Local ULAlerts
32. 7 Select Setup in the directory tree 8 The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication 9 Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Remotely on the Network from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization Ensure that the Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP checkbox under Personalization is checked and click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page Note Make sure that the NetWare protocol has been enabled per the instructions contained in this guide in the Network Installation section For NDS you will need to supply the NDS tree and context 10 In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Authentication Server 11 In the Authentication Server page select NDS Novell from the Authentication Type drop down menu 12 In the Default Tree Context Required area enter details in the NDS Tree and NDS Context fields 13 In the Alternate Tree Context Optional enter details for up to 2 NDS Tree and NDS Context field if required 14 Click on the Save button to save the settings and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 15 In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration 16 Onthe Service
33. Active Directory Users and Computers Select a user and select Properties and then Profile Ensure the user s Home Folder Location is set This will need to be set for each user who wants to use Scan to Home via LDAP Query Additional Requirements for Scan to Home with no LDAP Query e Create a folder on your network where scans are to be filed Share the folder and ensure users have Read and Write access privileges System Administrator Guide 11 1 Scan to Home ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enable and Configure Scan to Home 1 Atyour workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Services link 6 Click on the Scan to Home link 7 Select General in the directory tree 8 Onthe Scan to Home Setup screen check the Enabled checkbox for Status 9 Optional step In the Friendly Name box type in a user recognizable name of up to 127 characters for the template that will appear in Template Details on the device s user interface 10 Optional step if you want to change the default name of the Scan to Home template enter the required name in the Template Name box The default Scan to Home template is S2HOME Note If you change the default template name it is recommended that you
34. Add New button in the File Repository Setup area or the Edit button If the default File Repository has been set h Select HTTP or HTTPS from the Protocol drop down menu i Click on the Get Example Scripts link under Script Path and Filename to download an example script in PHP ASP or Perl language emo j Select an appropriate Script Language file which is supported by your HTTP Scan Repository server k Right click on the required script and select Save Target As to save the file to your HTTP Scan Repository server L Save the zip or gz file to a location on the desktop and extract it m Extract the downloaded file to the root of the Web Services home directory Write down the path and filename as you will need it later Create a login account for the device on the web server 10 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning Create a home directory for the device Add a bin directory to the home directory Place an executable CGI script in the bin directory 0 Make a note of the complete path to the executable CGI script When a document is scanned the device logs in using the account sends a POST request along with the scanned file then logs out The CGI script handles the remaining details of file transfer Create a directory on the web server or an alternate server to be used as a scan filing location repository a Set appropriate read a
35. Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button System Administrator Guide 8 5 Security 5 Click on the Security link 6 7 Click on the Enabled checkbox for the Audit Log 8 Click on the Apply button 9 Click on the Save button to save the log as a text file ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Select Audit Log in the directory tree Note that you must enable SSL before enabling Audit Log 10 Right click on the Download Log link and select Save Target As to download file 11 The Audit Log is saved as Auditfile txt gz This is a text file compressed as a GZIP file 12 Open the Auditfile txt gz compressed file 13 The Auditfile text is a raw text file To view the Audit Log as tab delimited text open the Auditfile txt document in an application that can import text as a tab delimited document such as Microsoft Excel View the Audit Log File Event ID A unique value that identifies the entry The following list shows the ID number allocated to each type of activity displayed in the Audit Log 1 System start up 2 System shutdown 3 On Demand Image Overwrite started 4 On Demand Image Overwrite complete 5 Print job 6 Network Scan job 7 Server Fax job 8 IFAX 9 E mail job 10 Audit Log Disabled 11 Audit Log Enabled 12 Copy 13 Embedded Fax 14 Print Fax driver LAN Fax job 15 Data Encryption 16 Scheduled O
36. Banner Sheets Touch the Disabled button Touch Save Press the Log In Out gt button then press Logout to exit the Tools pathway MO 4 c3 Saving and Reprinting Jobs The Save Job for Reprint feature allows users to store print jobs on the device from their print driver or the Print page of Internet Services then select the job from the device s user interface for reprinting This feature can be enabled and configured by the System Administrator from the Properties page of Internet Services the series of web pages hosted on the embedded HTTP server of the device Enabling the feature at a TCP IP Networked Workstation 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 if prompted enter the administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button 4 Click on the Services link System Administrator Guide 3 13 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 5 Click on the Reprint Saved Jobs link 6 Select Enablement in the directory tree 7 Click the Enabled radio button to enable the feature and click on the Apply button Backup Saved Jobs 1 Select Backup Jobs in the directory tree to back up saved jobs stored on the system 2 Under Settings from the Protocol drop down menu note that only FTP is available 3 Select either the IP
37. ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 4 Locate and open the Mac folder Instructions for Version 10 x OS X Double click to open the folder containing the drivers for version 10 x Double click to open the machine model dmg Double click to open the machine model pkg file When the Welcome screen displays click Continue Click Continue then Agree to accept the License Agreement Select the required disk if necessary where you want to install the printer Click Continue Click Install Click Close and restart the workstation De so When the workstation has restarted double click the hard drive icon 10 Double click the Applications icon 11 Double click the Utilities folder 12 Double click Print Center icon 13 Double click Add to add a new printer 14 Select AppleTalk as your network protocol 15 Select the required AppleTalk zone 16 Select the printer that you wish to set up 17 Select the Printer Model that is choose the PPD for your printer 18 Click Add 19 Print a document from an application to verify that the printer is installed correctly View the Macintosh Printer Utility on the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD CentreWare is a suite of applications used for installing maintaining and using the Xerox devices CentreWare Macintosh Printer Utility is a CentreWare application that enables network administrators to rename and rezone Xerox systems that
38. Configure Contexts for LDAP if desired 7 10 Configure Filters for LDAP if desired 7 10 Configure SLP on Windows NT 5 9 Configure Static IP Addressing 5 2 Confirmation Sheet 10 11 Connect the Ethernet Cable 2 3 Consumables 4 3 Control Panel 2 3 Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing Protocol on Wondows XP 5 18 Create an IPP Printer on Windows 2000 5 13 CUPS Common Unix Printing Systems 5 35 Custom Services 18 1 Validation Options 16 1 17 1 18 1 WSD Web Services for Devices 18 1 Customer Support 1 2 I 1 D Default DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Settings 5 7 Default Template 10 11 Description 4 6 Description and Alerts 4 2 Devices Profile for Web Services 18 1 DHCP 5 4 DHCP Autonet 4 Distribution Templates 10 11 DNS Configuration 5 5 DNS Configuration on Windows 2000 5 16 DNS DDNS Configuration 5 3 Domain Name 5 5 5 6 Dynamic Addressing DNS DDNS Configuration 5 3 Dynamic DNS Registration 5 4 Dynamic DNS Registration 5 4 Dynamic IP Addressing configure 5 4 E E mail 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 Advanced Settings 13 4 E mail Image Settings 13 5 Enable 13 2 Filing Options 13 5 General 13 3 General E mail Configuration 13 3 Layout Adjustment 13 4 Scan to E mail 13 4 E mail Addressing 13 1 E mail Alerts 4 10 Embedded Fax 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 Configure Fax Settings 15 3 Enable Dynamic DNS Registration 5 4 Enable WSD Web Services for D
39. Define the machine as a BSD style printer Type lpsystem t bsd hostname Where hostname is the machine hostname from the etc hosts file 4 Create the queue Type lpadmin p queuename s hostname T unknown I any Where queuename is the name of the queue being created 5 Type exit to exit the Bourne shell and exit to exit super user mode 6 Testthe queue created Type the command lp d queuename etc hosts Verify that the job prints at the device SCO UNIX Environment Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed gt Ensure that the correct IP Address is being used for the machine To verify this print a Configuration Report from the machine At the Device System Administrator Guide 5 33 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Press the Machine Status button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close The Configuration Report will print Verify the addresses detailed under TCP IP Settings opncnp Set up for a SCO UNIX Client SCO UNIX workstations require specific installation steps to communicate with the machine The machines are BSD style UNIX printers whereas SCO is System V style UNIX Ensure the machine is connected to the network with Ethernet cabling Add the machine printer hostname t
40. Delete e System Administrators Only to allow only users with administrative access password to delete jobs The System Administrator must provide a username and password when deleting a job 9 Touch Save button 10 Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Extensible Service Setup SMart eSolutions SMart eSolutions provides a setup page to guide you through the steps required to configure the device for automatic meter readings SMart eSolutions enables the device to automatically send data to Xerox to be used for billing Meter Assistant and solid ink Supplies Assistant There are three ways to register the device for SMart eSolutions e Client Direct registration gt SMart eSolutions Windows Client e CentreWare web For a full description of SMart eSolutions and to download the applications SMart eSolutions Windows Client or CentreWare web refer to www xerox com smartesolutions Note SMart eSolutions is not available in all countries Refer to your Xerox Representative for further information Information Checklist Before registering the device for Meter Assistant please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Create an account on Xerox com Add all devices in inventory that you wish to register for Automatic Meter Readings to your account e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network e TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be enabl
41. Enabled box to enable Service Location Protocol SLP Enter an IP address for the Directory Agent if required Enter the required name s for Scope 1 2 3 Select the Message type from the drop down menu for Multicast or Broadcast Enter a value for Multicast Radius 0 255 Enter a value for MTU to set the Maximum Transmission Unit 484 32768 with 1400 as the default This allows you to set the maximum packet size for SLP Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device System Administrator Guide 5 9 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 15 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified SNMP Allows you to configure the following options when accessing the device via SNMP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol settings can be configured via Internet Services You can also enable or disable Authentication Failure Generic Traps on the device SNMPv3 can be enabled to create an encrypted channel for secure device management 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click
42. FTP server Specify the IP address or host name of the repository For Document Path specify the path to the file repository For File Name type the file name for the backup to restore This name will be appended to the document path For Login Name if you selected System for Login Credentials referring to FTP repository in the Workflow Scanning topic then you must specify the system login name here For Password and Retype Password if you selected System for the login credentials then you can specify and confirm the system password here The password may be blank Click Select to Save New Password for an existing Login Name You must then click on the Start button at the bottom of the page to implement the password change or Undo to cancel any changes Online Offline The Online Offline window allows the System Administrator to stop and resume the system from receiving or sending jobs over the network At the device 1 Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 3 14 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button Touch the Tools tab Touch Network Settings Touch Online Offline To stop the device receiving or sending jobs over the network touch the Offline button Any installed optional features using the network for ex
43. IP Address of the device For example If the IP Address is 192 168 100 100 enter the following into the URL field http 192 168 100 100 3 Press Enter to view the Home page 4 Clickatab to access the desired page or click on the Index icon at the top of the device web page to access the index and contents list Many of the features available within Internet Services will require the System Administrator Login ID and Passcode The default being admin and 1111 A user will only be prompted for the Administrator User ID and Password once in a single browser session Status Description and Alerts The Description and Alerts page allows you to view the Device Model Name location IP Address and Status of the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Description and Alerts link Alerts The Alerts page allows you to view all current alert messages Each alert will specify what the problem is and a solution to the problem 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Description amp Alerts in the directory tree The following information is displayed in the Alerts field e Severity The importance or impact of the problem Status Code If the problem n
44. IPv6 5 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 J Job Log 10 11 Job Management 3 8 Jobs 4 4 L LAN Fax 16 1 Enable the Feature Windows Printer Drivers 16 1 Mac OS Users 16 2 Use the Feature 16 2 LDAP Addressing 13 6 Contexts 13 7 User Mappings 13 7 LDAP Query 11 2 Linearized PDF 3 5 Local UI Alerts 4 11 Low Supply Warning 4 12 LPR Line Printer Remote Printing in Mac OSX 5 25 LPR Printing on Windows NT 5 7 M Machine Digital Certificate Management 8 9 Machine Name 3 1 Microsoft Networking Configuration on Windows XP 5 20 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 6 4 MRC Compression 3 7 Mschine Digital Certificate Management Creating a Digital Certificate 8 10 N NDPS NEPS 5 27 NetWare Directory Services NDS 5 26 NetWare NCP NetWare Core Protocol 10 2 10 4 NetWare Settings Configuration 5 26 Network Accounting 18 1 19 1 20 1 Configuration 20 2 Enable and Configure Network Accounting 20 1 Network Authentication 7 2 802 1X Authentication 7 13 Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Solaris 7 3 Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 7 4 Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS 7 8 Authentication Configuration for NDS Novell 7 5 System Administrator Guide Authentication Configuration for SMB Windows NT4 and Windows 2000 2003 7 7 Authentication Off if available 7 19 Enable Web User Interface Authent
45. If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree e wg System Administrator Guide 5 17 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 8 Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing 9 Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 If two additional ports are available click Default All to see if they set to 9101 and 9102 respectively emulating HP JetDirect EX Plus 3 10 Leave the Bidirectional and Maximum Connections settings at their default values 11 Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job indicator 12 Leave the PDL Switching Enabled box at its default value 13 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Undo to return the settings to their previous values or Default All to enter printer defaults for all settings recommended 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device 15 Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 16 Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approxim
46. If the Password rules are changed old passwords are NOT AFFECTED by the new rules Setup To add a new user to the database 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Security link 6 Click on the User Information Database link 7 Select Setup in the directory tree 8 Onthe User Information Database page click on the Add New User button 9 Onthe Add New User page in the User Identification area enter the relevant details in all fields 10 In the User Role area select either one of the user role and click on the Add New User button To Edit a User on the Database 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link 2 8 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security Click on the User Information Database link Select Setup in the directory tree On the User Information Database page click on the Edit link next to the user you want to edit io go cO On th
47. If you want to add a graphic or logo to the cover sheet a bmp gif or jpeg click on New from the Cover Sheet Notes area To add a graphic or logo click on Picture from the Options menu Click on Choose File then click on the required graphic or logo from your Workstation Click on the required settings to adjust the scale position and preview options of your graphic Click on OK Click on the Cover Sheet Image menu and click on Options Click on Print in Background to print the graphic behind any text on the cover sheet Click on Print in Foreground to print the graphic at the front of your cover sheet or click on Blend to print a faint image of the graphic Click on the required Cover Sheet Paper Size Click on OK Setup Fax Options 28 29 30 Click on the Options tab Click on the required option from the Confirmation Sheet drop down menu Click on the required speed from the Send Speed drop down menu 6G3 14 4 Kbps Selects the transmission rate based on the maximum capabilities of the receiving fax device Initial transmission speed will be 14 400 Bits Per Second bps This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction Mode ECM System Administrator Guide 16 3 LAN Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Super G3 33 6 Kbps This is the fastest transmission rate and is the default setting This rate minimizes transmission errors by using Error Correction
48. Mac Workstation open the Printer Setup Utility Select the Xerox printer and click the Show Info button Click on Installable Options Select Installed from the Job Storage drop down menu Click on the Apply Changes button Close the Printer Info box Manage Folders Create New Folder Folders and the files saved within them can be managed using CentreWare Internet Services 1 To create a new folder access CentreWare Internet Services Open your web browser on your PC and enter the IP address of the ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 into the Address URL field Press lt Enter gt The CentreWare Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a Configuration Report Refer to How to Print a Configuration Report on page 3 2 Select the Jobs options 17 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Reprint Saved Jobs 4 Select the Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options 5 Select Create New Folder 6 Input the name for the folder in the Name field As a normal user you are only able to create Public folders These are the other kind of folders you may see The Public folder has been created by a user It can be used by any user and has no access authority limitations Any user can access and modify the documents in this folder The Read Only folder is created by the System Administrator or a user as a Read Only Public fold
49. NetWare on page 5 26 e 5000 Raw TCP IP Printing to Port 9100 CRTDEVPRT on page 5 28 e UNIX on page 5 31 System Administrator Guide 5 1 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 TCP IP Settings This section explains how to set up the device to operate in a Windows TCP IP environment The following information is provided e IPv4 on page 5 5 e IPv60n page 5 6 e Supporting LPR Printing on page 5 7 e Configure Raw TCP IP Printing on page 5 8 e Configure SLP on page 5 9 e SNMP on page 5 10 e SSDP on page 5 11 e Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming Service on page 5 11 e AppleTalk on page 5 12 e Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing Protocol on page 5 13 e Configure Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming Service on page 5 20 The device supports IP versions 4 and 6 IPv6 can be used instead of or in addition to IPv4 IPv4 Settings can be configured directly at the device user interface or remotely via a web browser using Internet Services IPv6 can only be configured using Internet Services To configure TCP IP Settings using Internet Services see Configure TCP IP Settings using Internet Services on page 5 5 Configure Static Addressing using the Device Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Existing operational network utilizing the TCP IP protocol e Ensure that
50. New distribution templates created for the device can be set to automatically update by entering a time in the Refresh Start Time area under Distribution Templates Note that Distribution Templates can be created with specific scan settings and destinations Refer to Configure the Default Template later in this document for further information Login Source settings control user access to a pool of templates stored on a remote server Communications to the server including entry of the required device Login Name and Password are set up by selecting Advanced then Template Pool Setup in the Internet Services directory tree Select Authenticated User to have the Authentication Server control remote template pool access Select Prompt at User Interface to have a standalone server prompt device users for access This works well for small offices without an Authentication server Select Prompt if Authenticated User Does Not Match Template Owner to prompt authenticated users accessing templates containing either no or other users owner names Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job Click on the Save button to accept changes made Go to the Device 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Touch the Workflow Scanning button on the touch screen Touch the Workflow Scanning tab Select All Templates
51. PC select Download and click Go Select a location on your PC to save the image To print the image at the device select Reprint and click Go To delete the image select Delete and click Go If you selected job log on the Scan Policies screen you will see a Job Log Select Open to view the job log or Save to save the job log to your computer If you selected to create a Single Page TIFF image select Open from the Action menu and click Go Select your Single Page TIFF image from the list and select the required option from the Action menu The options are Download Reprint or Delete To remove all images from your mailbox click the Delete All button To change your mailbox folder password or to remove your mailbox folder click Modify Folder To change your mailbox folder password enter your new password and click Save Password To remove your mailbox folder click Delete Folder System Administrator Guide 12 3 Scan to Mailbox ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 12 4 System Administrator Guide E mail The E mail feature enables a user to scan paper documents into an electronic format and have those documents delivered to a set of e mail recipients E mail Addressing Recipient addresses can be added by entering the SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol address for example name company com at the E mail screen In addition both an internal and a public address book can be configured for the device
52. Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 17 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 18 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 19 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features 7 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu 20 Click on the Apply button 21 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 22 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and Click on the Logout button Authentication Configuration for SMB Windows NT4 and SMB Windows 2000 2003 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree oo
53. Saved Jobs option a job must be saved to a folder on the device The folders are setup by the System Administrator using CentreWare Internet Services and can be managed by the users Refer to Manage Folders on page 17 2 for more information Jobs can be saved in the folders by selecting the Save Job for Reprint Job Type when submitting a print job from your PC or when submitting a print job using CentreWare Internet Services System Administrator Guide 17 3 Reprint Saved Jobs ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Using the Print Driver Select or create a document on your PC 1 Select Print from the application s File menu The application Print window is displayed Select the ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 printer from the Printer Name drop down menu Select Properties to access the print settings for the job Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Saved Job The Saved Job options are displayed Program the Saved Job options as required Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print to store and print the job Job Name is used to enter a name for the job or select Use Document Name to use the filename of the document being submitted Folder is used to select a location to store the job The Default Public Folder is available to all users other folders may have restricted access Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to the job The job can only be accessed and printed using the passcode
54. Select the model of your machine from the list Click Next 14 The Name your Printer screen appears Enter a printer name and click Next 15 The Printer Sharing Screen appears If you will be sharing this printer with other clients select Share As Windows 2000 or Share Name Windows 2003 and enter a share name Click Next 16 Enter a name and comment if required Click Next 17 Select Yes to print a test page Click Next 18 Click Finish The printer driver will install Configure the Print Driver From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers Right click on the printer icon and select Properties Click on the Advance tab then click on Printing Defaults Select the settings you wish to set for the printer IUe Me c You have completed the installation of the printer driver on Windows 2000 2003 Server For further information on Configuring the Printer Driver and Installation refer to the CentreWare Print Drivers Guide for Windows CD System Administrator Guide 6 3 Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Windows 2000 Professional Note You can use CentreWare to configure the Print Driver in this environment Xerox Printer Installer This section provides instructions on how to install printer drivers manually However you can use Xerox Printer Installer to discover the printer and install drivers To use the Xerox Printer Installer locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers
55. Start menu select Printers and Faxes 2 Click on the device printer icon and a Get More Info link will appear in the left hand pane of the window 3 Click the Get More Info link to go to straight to the device home page You have completed the installation of an IPP port and printer drivers Configure Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming Service Configure Microsoft Networking 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Microsoft Networking in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable Microsoft Networking 9 Select TCP IP or NetBIOS from the Transport drop down list 10 Enter the maximum number of connections allowed in Maximum Connections The range is 10 30 90 Qv ur p t9 m 11 Enter the Connection Timeout in the available box The range is 1 32767 seconds 12 Enter the workgroup name in the Workgroup box 13 Enter the SMB Host Name and type a descriptive comment in SMB Host Name Comment optional 14 Type the Share Name and type a descriptive comment in Share Name Comment optional Configure WINS if used 1 Checkthe Enabled box to enable WINS
56. Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu 19 Click on the Apply button 20 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 21 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Adding User Accounts at the Device Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab Touch Security Settings Touch User Administrator Accounts Read the on screen instructions to configure a User Account ITem oc gv Touch Configure Account touch User Account enter a Passcode of 1 9 digits and touch Save Account Touch Close 9 Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway oe 802 1X Authentication The device supports 802 1X authentication based on the Extensible Application Protocol EAP 802 1X can be enabled for devices connected through both wired and wireless Ethernet networks As described here the 802 1X configuration is used to authenticate the device rather than individual users After the device has been authenticat
57. Version 10 x 5 32 tty Method on SCO UNIX Environment 5 34 tty Method on Solaris 2 x 5 33 U Unicode 24 11 Usage Counters 3 13 Usage Limits 19 2 User Data Encryption 8 1 User Information Database 8 2 V Verify the IP Address 5 2 View audit log file 8 6 W Welcome Page 2 3 Windows XP 5 16 WINS Windows Internet Naming Service Configure 5 11 WINS Configuration on Windows XP 5 20 Workflow Scanning 9 1 10 1 Apply Factory Defaults 10 14 Machine Authentication 10 2 Workflow Scanning Image Settings 10 13 X Xerox ColorQube Series 1 1 Xerox Printer Installer 6 2 6 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Secure Access 21 1 Secure Access and Accounting 7 15 21 1 Xerox Standard Accounting 18 1 19 1 Create a General Account 19 4 Create a Group Account 19 2 Set Usage Limits 19 2 User Account 19 2 XPS 3 5 XPS Settings 3 7 System Administrator Guide I 5 I 6 ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 System Administrator Guide
58. and accessed from the E mail screen Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP provides access to the internal or corporate address book A public address book can be created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV comma separated values file E mail Authentication Authentication Service Access Control can be enabled on the device to prevent unauthorized access to the network options If Authentication is enabled a user will be prompted to enter a user name and password or a PIN before they can access the E mail feature For a full description of the Authentication feature refer to Authentication on page 7 1 of this guide Authentication can be configured after E mail has been installed Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to enabling E mail e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional so that the device web browser can be accessed Ensure that DNS settings are configured on the device This is required to access the device s Internet Services web pages which can be used to configure E mail settings from a network connected workstation s web browser Obtain the IP Address of a functional SMTP mail server that accepts inbound mail traffic e Create an e mail account on the mail server which the device wi
59. and optional settings Note Note that the web user interface Internet Services is now protected by the Administrator password so that you will need to log in with the User ID and Password the default is admin and 1111 BEFORE modifying any settings After working with settings make sure to log out by clicking on admin Logout in the upper right corner of the Internet Services screen then click on the Logout button We recommend that you change the Administrator password immediately after device installation A password of at least 9 characters in length should be sufficient for a year Once changed ensure the password is kept in a secure place for future use How to change the Administrator Password New Password 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab System Administrator Guide 3 1 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select Admin Password in the directory tree Ensure New Password tab is highlighted on the top of the screen Enter detail in the New Password and Retype New Password fields Click on the Apply button 10 Ni Oy OT Note The user name admin is reserved for the Device System Administrator Account Do NOT use the us
60. are configured for AppleTalk connectivity Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device follow the instructions contained in the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Macintosh Apple Macintosh TCP IP Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed Anexisting operational TCP IP network with Macintosh workstation computers equipped with Ethernet network interface cards e Macintosh Operating System of 10 x or higher e Alive network drop and Ethernet Cable for the Macintosh workstation gt The printing device should already be configured with a static IP address preferred Subnet Mask and Gateway Address as well as with a Host Name e The CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD delivered with your device Review any README file contained with the printer drivers System Administrator Guide 5 23 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enabling TCP IP on the device 1 9 4 5 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on t
61. are to be stored in the Network Home Path area The format should be servername foldername 11 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Scan to Home Subdirectory 18 If you want the device to create a Subdirectory in the network home path select Automatically create Subdirectory and enter a name in the Subdirectory name area 19 If your network home path consists of folders with user names and you want the device to file scanned images in these folders select Append User Name to Path The User Name refers to the name entered by the user when they are authenticated at the Xerox device 20 If you selected No LDAP Query you will need a method to distinguish individual ownership of job scans To do this select Append User Name to Path or Automatically Create User Name directory to if one does not exist 21 Click on the Apply button to accept changes Use Scan to Home 1 Atthe device touch the Workflow Scanning tab 2 Enter your network authentication username and password 3 Atthe Workflow Scanning Template List touch the Scan to Home template The default name is S2HOME 4 Put your documents in the device to scan and press the green start button 5 Retrieve your documents from the home directory System Administrator Guide 11 3 Scan to Home ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 11 4 System Administrator Guide Scan to Mailbox The Scan to Mailbox feature is supported through the Wo
62. box Select NetWare from the Protocol drop down menu Enter the server name where the scan filing repository is located in the Server Name box Enter the server volume in the Server Volume box Enter the context and tress in the NDS Context and NDS Tree boxes NetWare 4 x 5 x 6 x IPX only for the repository For NDS enter a name context For bindery and bindery emulation leave these fields blank Enter the path to the scan filing location in the Document Path box Select a radio button for Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine user access to the file server Select Prompt at User System Administrator Guide 10 5 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Interface to have the file server determine user access Select System to have the system directly log in to the file server 16 Supply a Login Name and Password if the system will be directly accessing the file server 17 Click on the Save button to accept the changes 18 To configure General Settings select General in the directory tree 19 To print a Confirmation Sheet after every scan job select On from the drop down menu 20 New distribution templates created for the device can be set to automatically update by entering a time in the Refresh Start Time area 21 Login Source settings control user access to a pool of templates stored on a remote server Co
63. by a user Enter information in the Default Login Context box Click on the Apply button User Mappings Fields contained within LDAP structures are not standardized This section allows you to find out what results you will get when searching for a name using one of the LDAP servers Choosing the right LDAP server will improve your success when performing name searches To map the LDAP fields 15 16 17 Click on the User Mappings tab in the LDAP Settings Menu at the top of the screen Click on the Search button The information about this user is then displayed against the fields shown on the device By using the drop down menu under Imported Heading boxes re map any fields you require against the device s properties System Administrator Guide 13 7 E mail ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Note Internet Fax users should ensure that the Internet Fax field is NOT set to Mappings Available in the drop down menu This setting will prevent the LDAP Address Book appearing on the Internet Fax screen at the device Select Mail as the Internet Fax setting 18 When you have finished making your selections click on the Apply button At the Device 19 Select the E mail button then touch OK 20 Touch Address Book 21 Enter a name using the keyboard touch screen for example lastname firstname 22 Touch Search The Search Results Screen will appear Select the required name from the list if there is
64. click on the Apply button System Administrator Guide 3 5 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 9 Click on the OK button when you see a dialog box that says Properties have been successfully modified TIFF Tagged Image File Formot Settings Tagged Image File Format is a multi platform format for raster bitmapped graphics Nearly every graphics application can read and write TIFF Depending upon your needs select which version of TIFF Compression the device will use e TIFF 6 0 old JPEG e TIFF Specification Supplement 2 new JPEG gt LZW This is a lossless compression method yielding very high compression efficiency LZW works best for files containing repetitive data such as is the case with text and monochrome images LZW has long been associated with TIFF and GIF images This compression algorithm was widely used in Adobe Photoshop until version 6 and Adobe Acrobat until version 5 PDF amp PDF A Settings Select Optimized for Fast Web Viewing if you want to create linearized PDF files Linearized PDF files allow the first page of the PDF file to be displayed in a user s web browser before the entire file is downloaded from the web server This fast first page display helps to alleviate Internet user frustration in waiting for an entire file to download before displaying the file s contents Select MRC Compression if you want to use Mixed Raster Content MRC compression MRC is used to divide the scanned ima
65. cnn eect eee neces 24 5 Are the Internet Fax Settings Correctly Configured 24 5 Troubleshooting Server 24 7 Is the Device Functioning on the Network as a Printer 24 7 Is the Fax Button Available on the Device 0002022212 24 7 Are the Server Fax Settings Correctly 1 001602 24 8 Troubleshooting Embedded Fax 00 c cece cence ence 24 8 Is the device functioning pp rn 24 8 Ensure Embedded Fax is Installed Correctly 0 c eee eee eee 24 9 Troubleshooting Network Accounting 0 cece eee eee eee ene 24 9 Is the Device Functioning on the Network as a Printer 24 9 Power On OF vicatedmusaternieameuindzantiantnawerades aaa 24 10 Font Management Utility and Unicode 00 cece 24 11 0 eane E 00 24 11 NS I 1 System Administrator Guide ix ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 System Administrator Guide Introduction This guide has been created for System Administrators who need to install set up and manage printers and other services on their network To use the procedures in this Guide effectively System Administrators must have previous experience working in a network environment and must possess Supervisor Administrator Account Operator or equivalent rights to the network They must also have prior knowledge of how to create and manage network user accoun
66. designed to be viewed quickly in a web browser When a user views an interleaved XPS document the document downloads and displays the text before the images so that the user can start reading the document without needing to wait for the whole document to download and display Select your required options for Searchable XPS PDF and PDF A Defaults Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Compression Capability 1 2 3 Select Edit Select the required compression CCITT Group 4 uses Modified Read compression Allows for fast scan and viewing performance but creates larger file sizes JBIG2 JBIG2 will compress text smaller than Group 4 compression although it takes longer to process JBIG2 exports PDF files as version 1 4 PDF Flate Select Flate if you want to add additional lossless compression to any JPEG compression performed by the device Flate only applies to colour images within a Mixed Raster Content MRC file and exports files as version 1 4 PDF TIFF TIFF compression is available when the Colour Scanning Enablement Kit is fitted to the device Some Windows applications cannot read the default TIFF output If this functionality is required select LZW LZW is a lossless general purpose compression used for colour and grayscale TIFF images LZW creates a far larger file size than TIFF MRC If you want to use MRC Compression select the required option in the MRC Compression Capability area
67. distribution of CUPS is available in tar format with installation and removal scripts as well as in rpm and dpkg formats for RedHat and Debian versions of Linux After logging into the workstation as root su and downloading the appropriate files to the root directory the installation begins as follows Tar format After untarring the files run the installation script with the cups install and press Enter RPM format rpm e lpr rpm i cups 1 1 linux M m n intel rpm and press Enter Debian format dpkg i cups 1 1 linux M m n intel deb and press Enter Note RedHat Linux versions 7 3 and newer include CUPS support so software downloading is unnecessary CUPS is also the default printing system for Mandrake Linux Installing the Xerox PPD on the workstation The Xerox PPD for CUPS is available on one of the CD ROMs that came with your printer From the CD ROM with root privileges copy the PPD into your CUPS ppd folder on your workstation If you are unsure of the folder s location use the Find command to locate the ppd s An example of the location of the ppd gz files in RedHat 8 1 is usr share cups model Adding the Xerox printer 1 Use the PS command to make sure that the CUPS daemon is running The daemon can be restarted from Linux using the init d script that was created when the CUPS RPM was installed The command is gt etc init d cups restart A similar script or directory entry should have been created in Sys
68. entered here Select OK to save the settings and exit the Saved Job options Program the print features required for the saved job Note The Help option provides an explanation of all the options Select OK to save the print settings Select OK on the Print dialogue window to send the job The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving and printing depending on the selection Using CentreWare Internet Services The Print option within CentreWare Internet Services can also be used to create a Saved Job The job file submitted must be a print ready file such as a PDF or PostScript file 1 At your workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Note Click on the Services link To find out the IP address of your device print a Configuration Report Select Print to access the Job Submission options Enter the file name of the job requiring saving or use the Browse option to locate the file Select the Job Type drop down menu and select Save Job for Reprint The Saved Job options are displayed Select Save to store the job only or Save and Print to store and print the job Job Name is used to enter a name for the job Folder is used to select a location to store the job The Default Public Folder is available to all users other folders may have restricted access Secure Saved Job is used to add a passcode to
69. finished with each screen 8 If youhave more than one service to configure click on the Configure Next Service button Otherwise click Close 9 Test your service at the device to verify that it is configured correctly Cloning Cloning enables you to copy the settings and web generated scan templates of one device and transfer them to other devices operating with the same version of system software Depending on the optional features installed on the device groups of settings can be cloned For example scan settings will be available for cloning only if the Workflow Scanning optional feature is already installed on the source device After selecting the settings to be cloned a configuration cloning file is created and saved with the extension dim downloadable module The configuration cloning file can then be submitted to other devices using Internet Services via a web browser The settings are transferred and applied to the recipient device Note Optional features must be installed on the recipient device in order to accept cloned settings In other words it is not possible to install an optional feature for example Workflow Scanning or E mail through the process of cloning All devices involved in the cloning procedure must contain the same system software version To Verify the Software Version 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter
70. from the All Templates drop down menu Select the Default template and place a document in the document handler View template details on the monitor Press the Start button to scan the document Check the scan folder on your file server to verify the image was filed The Next Step button is to proceed to the Configure the Default Template instructions Optional Step Configure General Settings At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Click on the General link 10 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning Confirmation Sheet Note The Confirmation Sheet specifies the success or failure of the Workflow Scanning job 7 Select one of the following options from the Confirmation Sheet drop down menu a On Prints a Confirmation Sheet after every Workflow Scanning job b Errors only Prints a Confirmation Sheet only when the job is unsuccessful c Off Turns off the Confirmation Sheet printing function Distribution Templates 8 Users can create Scan Templates with specific Workflow Scanning settings and destinations If you want the device to automatically update templates stored in
71. have been uploaded to the device Click the browser Back button to return to the LDAP Settings screen Maximum Number of Search Results between 5 and 100 This is the maximum number of addresses that will appear which match the search criteria selected by the user Set the search results to one less than the server will allow For example if the LDAP server limit is 75 set the search results to 7A or less Search Timeout There are two options You can let the server use its timeout limit by selecting the Wait LDAP Server Limit or specify how many seconds the search should last between 5 and 100 If the search takes longer than the time specified in the Wait seconds box the user will be notified that the search failed LDAP Referrals if the primary LDAP server is connected to additional servers the search will continue on those servers as well The Perform Query on option will help control the returns by allowing the LDAP query to be on Mapped Name or Surname and Given Name Fields Netscape and Lotus Domino will typically require a setting of Surname to allow returns of lastname firstname 11 Click on the Apply button to implement the changes Contexts 12 13 14 Click on the Contexts tab under the LDAP title at the top of the screen Contexts are used with the Authentication feature The administrator can configure the device to automatically add an authentication context to the Login Name provided
72. if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Qo m Igy um m o Configure Authorization Access by groups for LDAP LDAP server user groups can be used to control access to certain areas of the Xerox device For example the LDAP server may contain a group of users called Admin You can configure the Admin group on the device so that the members of that group will have administrator access to the device When a user logs in at the device with their network authentication account the device performs an LDAP look up to determine if the user is a member of any groups If the LDAP server confirms that the user is a member of the Admin group the user will have administrator access to the device 1 Ifyouare continuing from Step 31 in the previous procedure Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS click on Authorization Access heading tab under the LDAP title 2 If you have already logged out of Internet Services or closed your browser at a networked workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocol link Select LDAP in the directory tree then click on Authorization Access heading tab under the LDAP title Select t
73. indicator 12 Leave the PDL Switching Enabled box at its default value 13 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes 5 18 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device 15 Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 16 Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time 17 A Configuration Report should have printed by default when the device rebooted 18 If the Configuration Report did not print go to the device e Press the Machine Status button gt Touch the Machine Information tab e Touch Information Pages e Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close 19 Review the settings for Raw TCP IP Printing under the heading TCP IP Settings These settings should read as follows a Raw TCP IP Printing Enabled Enabled b Raw TCP IP Port Number 9100 Create an IPP Printer at your Workstation Verify the correct software is loaded 1 Atyour Workstation right click the My Network Places icon Select Properties Right click on the Local Area Connection icon Click Properties Verify that
74. is 1 32767 seconds 11 Enter the workgroup name in the Workgroup box 12 Enter the SMB Host Name and type a descriptive comment in SMB Host Name Comment optional 13 Type the Share Name and type a descriptive comment in Share Name Comment Configure WINS if used When running WINS the device registers its IP address and NetBIOS Hostname with a WINS server WINS allow the device to communicate using hostname only removing a significant overhead from the systems administrators WINS server address is stored in the file smart etc wins Name It is possible to manually enable WINS and configure primary and secondary WINS servers through Internet Services 14 Check the Enabled box under Protocol to enable WINS 15 Enter the IP Address in the Primary Server IP Address of a Primary Server 16 Enter the IP Address in the Secondary Server IP Address of a Secondary Server Note If DHCP is configured WINS IP Address es will be overridden 17 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values Note The settings are not applied until you reboot the device 18 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified AppleTalk Enabling AppleTalk on the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar Press Enter Click on the Properties t
75. more than one match 23 Touch the To button to select the name as a recipient for your e mail 24 Touch Close The e mail address will appear in the Address List 25 Place a document to e mail in the document handler and press the green start button 26 Verify that the recipient received the scanned document in his her e mail inbox Configuring the From Address For From address configuration refer to the E mail Settings screen within Internet Services For instructions review the Configure General E Mail Settings section earlier in this document You have completed the steps to configure a company address book via LDAP Addressing Public Address Book If you do not have an LDAP server to provide access to a corporate address list the device will accept a Public Address Book file that contains a list of user names and associated e mail addresses This file must be in a CSV Comma Separated Values format for the device to be able to read the file contents The device can have access to both an LDAP server and a public address book If both are configured the user will be presented with the choice to use either address book to select e mail recipients The majority of word processing or spreadsheet packages will allow you to create a CSV file A selection of E mail applications will also allow you to export a list of users in the CSV file format There are also several conversion packages available on the web Public Addre
76. not applied until you restart the device Create a Device Description Create a device description from your AS400 terminal s command line 1 Select the F 4 key to prompt the CRTDEVPRT command Enter the following parameters Device Description Xeroxprinter Device Class lan Device Type 3812 Device Model 1 2 Press Enter to continue and enter the following parameters 5 28 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation Lan Attachment IP Port Number 9100 Online at IPL yes Font Identifier 11 Form Feed autocut Note For some versions of AS400 the default may match some of these parameters Leave all other parameters at the default value press Enter and enter the following parameters Activation Timer 170 Inactivity Timer sec15 Host Print Transform yes Press Enter to continue and enter the following parameter Manufacturer Type and Model hp5si Leave the remaining parameters set to their default values and press Enter to continue Enter the following parameters Remote Location Enter the IP address of the printer User defined options IBMSHRCNN System driver program IBMSNMPDRV Leave all other options set to the default values and press Enter A message indicates that you created the device Xerox printer Power on the device and start a print writer Then place a spool file in the appropriate queue to test the printer AS400 Printing using LPR CRTOUTQ Op
77. of the fax card or at a later date Embedded Fax is an optional feature for the device Server Fax and Embedded Fax The Embedded Fax and Server Fax services are mutually exclusive and only one of them can be enabled at any time If Server Fax is currently enabled and Embedded Fax is then enabled Server Fax will be disabled automatically Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensurethe device is fully functioning in its existing configuration prior to installation e Ensure the device has access to a telephone connection Obtain the telephone number that you wish to assign to the fax device Hardware e Locate the Fax Hardware Kit Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you do not have the Fax Hardware Kit e Locate the 2 Line Fax Kit if this has been purchased Install the Fax Hardware Kit Note If Server Fax is installed on the device when the Embedded Fax Install Wizard is running the Server Fax feature will be disabled and users will only have access to the Embedded Fax feature 1 Switch the power off by pressing the Power Off button 2 Wait until the Network Controller to fully power off The blinking green network activity light will be extinguished when this occurs 3 Install the Fax Hardware Kit following instructions contained with the kit 4 Connectthe telephone cable to the port on the device Syst
78. on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select SNMP in the directory tree Configure SNMP v1 v2c Note For security purposes Xerox recommends that the administrator changes the SNMP v1 V2c public private community strings from their default string names to random string names 8 Checkto ensure the Enable SNMP v1 v2c Protocols box is selected 9 Click on the Edit SNMP v1 v2c Properties button 10 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 11 Click on the Login button 12 Enter a name for the GET Community Name The default is public 13 Enter a name for the SET Community Name The default is private Note Changes made to the GET or SET community names for this device will require corresponding GET or SET community name changes for each application which uses the SNMP protocol to communicate with this device for example Xerox PrinterMap Xerox CentreWare any 3rd party network management applications 14 Enter a name for the default TRAP Community Name The default is SNMP trap Note The Default TRAP community name is used to specify the default community name for all traps generated by this device The Default TRAP community name can be overridden by the TRAP community name specified for each individual TRAP destination address The TRAP community name for one address may not be the same TRAP community name specified f
79. press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Alert Notification link Select E mail Alerts in the directory tree Check the box labelled Billing meter reads reported under Recipient Group Preferences area Click on the Apply button 0 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified SO 0 Ge COS NS Local UI Alerts System Administrators can set up the local UI user interface to warn users that the scan disk is running low on memory potentially impacting system performance and or causing job loss To Set up the Local UI Alert 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Alert Notification link Select Local UI Alerts in the directory tree Select the radio button corresponding to the warning that you wish to provide if Custom is selected enter an amount between 0 75 in the Custom box Oo iwl Qv VI NS 9 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settin
80. protocols that secure IP communications at the network layer of the protocol stack using both authentication and data encryption techniques The ability to send IP Sec encrypted data to the printer is provided by the use of a public cryptographic key following a network negotiating session between the initiator client workstation and the responder printer or server To send encrypted data to the printer the workstation and the printer have to establish a Security Association with each other by verifying a matching password shared secret to each other If this authentication is successful a session public key will be used to send IP Sec encrypted data over the TCP IP network to the printer Providing additional security in the negotiating process SSL Secure Sockets Layer protocols are used to assure the identities of the communicating parties with digital signatures individualized checksums verifying data integrity precluding password guessing by network sniffers IP Sec security settings are the means by which an administrator can configure multiple groups of hosts and groups of protocols Also this feature is used to setup IPsec and IKE protocols on the printer The IP Sec implementation is a full implementation that the device can initiate a connection for print scan and administration and fully work with other industry IPsec nodes IPsec is necessary to secure many protocols including e LPRand Port9100 printing e FTP Fili
81. the Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol has been loaded USES UNS Install the Printer Driver 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP The Vista path is Start Control Panel Printer s Double click the Add Printer icon and click Next Verify that Network Printer is selected and click Next The Locate Your Printer Windows 2000 or Specify a Printer Windows XP screen will appear To create an IPP printer select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet Type HTTP followed by the printer s fully qualified Domain name or IP address in the URL field The Printer Name can be either the Host Name or the SMB Host Name as shown on the device Configuration Report depending on the name resolution used by your network WINS or DNS 7 Click Next 8 Select Have Disk and browse to the location of the printer driver INF 9 Click OK to install the printer driver 10 Select the Printer Model and Click Next 11 Select Yes if you wish to make this the default printer 9v Mr SES 12 Select Yes to print a Test Page Verify that it prints at the device 13 Click Finish System Administrator Guide 5 19 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Internet Services Once installed an IPP printer will provide a link directly to the Internet Services web pages To Access Internet Services 1 From the
82. the ColorQube device Note If printing PCL set this parameter to HPIIID HP5Si most of the HP drivers will work and set Workstation customizing object as none If printing ASCII set this parameter to IBMA2011 which is the default System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation UNIX HP UX Client Version 10 x HP UX workstations require specific installation steps to communicate with the machine The machine is a BSD style UNIX printer whereas HP UX is a System Vstyle UNIX Use the correct case when entering commands UNIX commands are case sensitive Note All UNIX commands are case sensitive so enter the commands exactly as they are written Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure that the correct IP Address is being used for the machine To verify this print a Configuration Report from the device At the Device e Press the Machine Status button on the device e Touch the Machine Information tab e Touch Information Pages e Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close The Configuration Report will print Verify the addresses detailed under TCP IP Settings e Ensure the machine is connected to the network with Ethernet cabling e Ensure you can PING the machine IP address from the UNIX workstation Configure the Client 1 Addthe machine hos
83. the device comes back online if the Tools screen is still displayed with a message indicating that you are still logged in as Administrator press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Configure 802 1X with Internet Services In addition to enabling 802 1X at the device 802 1X can be configured with Internet Services the embedded HTTP server running on the device Make sure that the HTTP and TCP IP protocols are properly configured for your network before attempting to use your web browser to communicate with the device s HTTP server Note Some ports in an 802 1X environment may not be open preventing Internet Services screens from being displayed If this is the case enable and configure 802 1X first at the device as previously stated in this section then use Internet Services to modify settings as required and stated below Note 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control is used to ensure that devices that are connected to the network have the proper authorization The 802 1X configuration is used to authenticate the multifunction device rather than an individual user After the device has been authenticated it will be accessible to users on the network 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111
84. the fax repository with the fax job click on the Save button to accept changes and return to the Default page In the Server Fax section click on the Edit button select the desired options for 2 Sided Scanning Content Type How Originals was Produced and Resolution click on the Apply button to accept changes and return to the Default page In the Image Quality section click on the Edit button to Lighten or Darken the document and select the Suppression option click on the Apply button to accept changes and return to the Default page In the Layout Adjustment section click on the Edit button select the desired option for Original Orientation and Original Size click on the Apply button to accept changes and return to the Default page In the Filing Options section click on the Edit button to set the default for Delay Start click on the Apply button to accept changes and return to the Default page At the Device 7 I Touch the Fax button from the touch screen then touch OK Enter a valid fax number Touch Add then Close Load a document in the document handler and press the Start button Verify that your fax is received at the specified fax device 23 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Server Fax Configure a Fax Repository using SMTP Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following item is available or has been performed gt
85. the job The job can only be accessed and printed using the passcode entered here 17 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Reprint Saved Jobs Program the Paper 2 Sided Printing Output Colour Collate Orientation Staple and Output Destination as required 5 Select Submit Job at the top of the page to send the job to the device over the internet The job is processed and sent to the device for saving or saving and printing depending on the selection System Administrator Guide 17 5 Reprint Saved Jobs ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 17 6 System Administrator Guide Custom Services Validation Options The Validation Options feature is used with the Workflow Scanning Validation Server and the Network Authentication features When a user enters their metadata information at the user interface the metadata is passed to the validation server to be verified When Validation Options is enabled the user s ID is also passed with the validation request to the Validation Server The user ID is recorded when the user enters their network authentication account details at the user interface Enable Validation Options 1 Atyour workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services
86. the printer drivers Enabling AppleTalk on the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select AppleTalk in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable the AppleTalk Protocol Type a name for the device in Printer Name The default name is XRX_MAC address oO Ni 5 Note The default local zone is identified as This should only be changed if you have defined zones on your network 10 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values 11 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device Install the Print Driver Refer to the Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Macintosh on the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD for detailed instructions 1 View the Configuration Report and note the Name given to the device under AppleTalk Settings At the Macintosh Workstation 2 Loadthe CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM into your CD drive 3 Openthe CD and locate the Drivers folder 5 22 System Administrator Guide
87. the remote template pool server and appears as DEFAULT in the list of templates on the device The default template consists of configured scan settings and at least one network filing location Once the default template has been configured all subsequent templates created with Internet Services or SMARTsend software inherit the settings Users can modify these settings with any new templates they create The default template settings however can only be changed by the System Administrator The default template also cannot be deleted from either the local or remote template pool 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address or location of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 System Administrator Guide 10 11 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link m Select Default Template in the directory tree Destination Services 8 If available select the desired service by clicking on either the Fax or File links Note The Fax service requires the Server Fax feature to be installed on the device Filing Options 9 Select Edit 10 Enter a name in the Document Name box for the document scanned 11 Select the Document Format from the following options
88. the report to verify TCP IP settings If the Configuration Report did not print go to the device gt Press the Machine Status button gt Touch the Machine Information tab e Touch Information Pages e Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close Select the PPD PostScript Printer Definition I Insert the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD into your CD drive Double click the printer icon on your desktop Select Printing Select Change Setup Select Change Locate the Drivers folder on the CD Select the appropriate PPD for OS 10 x 5 24 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 8 Select the options according to those installed on your device 9 Click OK 10 Print a document from an application to verify that the printer is installed correctly Set up LPR Line Printer Remote Printing in Mac OSX 1 Load the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM into your CD drive 2 Openthe CD and select the required language 3 Double click to open the Drivers folder 4 Double click to open the Mac folder Note There may be more than one Print and Fax Drivers CD If the Mac folder does not appear check for another Print and Fax Drivers CD Double click to open the folder containing the drivers for version 10 x Double click to open the machine model dmg file Double click to open the machine model pkg file 9 xou
89. the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link 9v gr eoe c Click on the Cloning link from the directory tree System Administrator Guide 4 7 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 7 Toclone all features simply click on the Select All button or to customize individually click on the Clear All button and click to check the individual feature box to be cloned 8 Click on the Clone button The cloning file will be saved as Cloning dlm 9 Torename file extension right click on link select Save Target As rename file and click on the Save button To Install a Clone file 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Cloning link from the directory tree Scroll down to the Install Clone File area click on the Browse button Select the cloning file and click on the Open button Click on the Install button O 4 OY UT fw N Note Once installation of the clone file beg
90. to Embedded Fax on page 15 1 If the fault requires further investigation refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support Troubleshooting Network Accounting If you are experiencing problems with Network Accounting first verify that the device is connected on the network and functioning as a printer by performing the following activities e Check the network cable at the back of the device e Senda test page from your PC to the device e If connected via TCP IP try a PING from your workstation to the device Is the Device Functioning on the Network as a Printer Configure your device on the network or resolve any networking issues before attempting to use the Network Accounting feature For instructions to configure the device on the network see Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 Ensure Network Accounting is installed correctly At the device press the Services button and touch any button on the screen interface Does the device ask you for a User Name and Account System Administrator Guide 24 9 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Verify that Network Accounting is installed and enabled before proceeding To verify that Network Accounting is installed print a Configuration Report and look under Installed Options to see the status of Network Accounting To print a Configuration Report at the device press the Machine Status button touch Print Reports touch Configuration Report touch Pri
91. to Port 9100 CRTDEVPRT 000s 5 28 AS400 Printing using LPR CRTOUTQ Optional pp 5 29 Wpewee EE A NE KEER 5 31 HP UX Client Version 10 X 2 0 0 cece nent nee I 5 31 Information Checklist 12 cod sedie Mba eta adda n Redit whence awa 5 31 Sol e 5 32 SCO UNIX Envirorirnent site 2b rechRRORe te hene C REC D Needs 5 33 CUPS M P 5 35 6 PUNE Vue URP REP YETRRC UHR PORRO EA d avs 6 1 Windows 2000 2003 Server sind esie eie uu eb we erue te Re REESE 6 2 6 2 Information Checklist nica ccscds caddie des ee thue hore pA ERAI eda 6 2 Windows Add Printer Wizard pp 6 2 Verify that Print Services Tor UNIX Is loaded pp 6 2 Add the Printer pp 6 3 Configure the Print Driver sisse 6 3 Windows 2000 POE Ls aacra a e AUC CER Je SUR R trannies 6 4 Xerox Printer Installer pp 6 4 Information Checklist 5 6 4 Connect to an Existing Print Queue pp 6 4 Add Elie Pri 0 suus sme eR e me eR RR DER DIS RCON RO E pda 6 4 99999 6 5 Verify that Print Services for UNIX Is loaded pp 6 5 AGG TNE ana sameorond seattle coaee ee aden 6 5 Configure th Print DIVES ooa wiaciens aq E SRL RE neha nia epa id d 6 6 System Administrator Guide V vi ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 oberen ee obe epo est epi denopeptbe pi ea 6 7 Xerox Printer Installer sssssssssssssss III 6 7 Information
92. you will see this option in Internet Services Fax Images Sent sets the maximum number of documents that can be faxed by a user with the Fax feature Embedded Fax The device calculates the number of faxed documents by multiplying the number of images faxed this includes cover sheets by the number of destinations Embedded Fax Receive If Embedded Fax is installed on your device you will see this option This sets the maximum number of documents that a user can produce from the following features on the device Print Mailbox Poll Remote Mailbox Print Poll Store Poll Remote Fax For example to restrict the maximum number of prints this user can make to 1000 prints enter 1000 in the Black or Color Copied Impressions field Cover sheets and banner sheets are counted as part of the job and will add to the number of impressions 18 Click on the Apply button when you have finished setting the usage limits Maximum Usage Limits The first time a user logs in to the device after they have reached their maximum usage limit a message displays on the user interface The message notifies the user that they have reached their limit for the feature Users will not be able to use the feature until their limit is reset If the user performs a copy scan or fax job at the device and mid way through the job their limit is exceeded the job will continue The device will track the number of sheets that were printed over the lim
93. 202 9203 Device Connection Ethernet Configuration Ethernet Port The Ethernet Interface is set to auto detect the speed of your network The device supports the following selectable speeds e Auto 10Mbps Half Duplex e 10Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 1 Gbps Half Duplex e 1 Gbps Full Duplex Note If your network has hubs that have Auto Sensing enabled and the device Ethernet speed is set to Auto it is possible that the hub will not arbitrate to the correct speed Setting the Ethernet speed at the device 1 Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway N Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter the Password 1111 then touch Enter Press the Machine Status button Touch Tools Touch Network Settings Touch Advanced if a warning message appears touch Continue Touch Ethernet Physical Media Select the Speed to match the speed set on your hub or switch 9 Touch Save touch Close 10 Press the Log In Out gt button 11 Touch Confirm to exit the Tools Pathway OO Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device Look at the Configuration Report verify whether the addressing shown under TCP IP Settings will enable this device to communicate over your network Also verify that HTTP is enabled under HTTP Settings to enable use of the device s web user interface for network and options configuration If necessar
94. 512Kb to 20480 Kb Number of Fragments and the Total Job Size can all be set to control the size of E mail jobs sent to the SMTP Server Select the required setting for the E mail Job Splitting Boundary For Login Credentials select None if the mail account does not need password access If the mail account does require a password select System then enter the SMTP Server Login Name and Password Select the required option for Logo Credentials for the Walkup User to send Scanned E mails Click on the Apply button to implement any changes Configure POP3 Settings 1 90 zw vocum De po At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select POP3 Setup in the directory tree Select either IPv4 Address or Host Name and enter the POP3 Server IP Address and Port number or Host Name and Port number in the Server Information section Enter the Login Name and Password details System Administrator Guide 14 3 Internet Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 10 11 12 Check the Enable receipt of E mail by POP3 box in the POP3 Settings section Enter the required setting for the Polling interval 1 60 minutes Cl
95. Address or Host Name radio button for your FTP server 4 Specify the IP address or host name of the repository 5 For Document Path specify the path to the file repository 6 For File Name type the file name for the backup This name will be appended onto the end of the document path 7 For Login Name if you selected System for Login Credentials referring to FTP repository in the Workflow Scanning topic then you must specify the system login name here 8 For Password and Retype Password if you selected System for the login credentials then you can specify and confirm the system password here The password may be blank 9 Check Select to Save New Password for an existing Login Name You must then click the Start button at the bottom of the page to implement the password change or Undo to cancel any changes Restore Saved Jobs 1 9 gui gw Select Restore Jobs in the directory tree to restore saved jobs stored on a repository Note When Saved Jobs are restored all current Saved Jobs data will be immediately deleted The restore process may take considerable time to complete depending on how many files were backed up The restored Saved Jobs data is not appended to the existing Saved Jobs If the restore is aborted the Default Public Folder will be empty Note that only FTP is available in the Protocol drop down menu under Settings Select either the IP Address or Host Name radio button for your
96. B Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Create a shared folder to be used as a scan filing location repository for scanned documents Note the Share Name of the folder and the Computer Name or Server Name e Create a user account and password for the device with full access rights to the scan directory Note the user account and password e Test the settings by attempting to connect to the shared folder from another PC by logging in with the user account and password Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights 10 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning At your Workstation 9o NY LET SES UM NI 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select File Repository Setup in the directory tree Click on the Add New button in the File Repository Setup area or the Edit button If the default File Repository has been set Note During device configuration SMARTsend if used o
97. CD ROM delivered with your device and follow the instructions contained in the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Microsoft Windows Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Verify the device is configured with the correct IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address information by printing a Configuration Report To print a Configuration Report go to the Device Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages eo Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close e Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD This was delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device Review any README file contained with the printer drivers To install printer drivers on Windows 2000 Professional choose one of the following options e Connect to an existing print queue already created on a network server e Create a new print queue on the Windows 2000 Professional workstation Connect to an Existing Print Queue At the Windows 2000 Professional Desktop right mouse click the My Network Places icon Select Properties Right click on the Local Area Connection icon Select Properties vr uper msc Verify that the Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol has been loaded If this software is not present install it using the documentat
98. ChEcklisSt 242244 6 7 Connect to an Existing Print Queue pp 6 7 Configure th Print DEVE suis dtd nb one de dws Koln ed RU Ra FARE d 6 8 6 8 05 Create a New Print Queue on Windows Add the Printer 2sicccncdsadicadenteudediadie sc atdanit e e 6 8 Configure the Print Driver aoo va oaa er ROC ERA EROR P a Ra v el 6 9 Windows Vista i3 doso doors staunch hehe NON RASEN AUR A dee mega Abe Bad 6 10 Xerox Printer Installer 4 aee etx re be Ex Re E Re ees 6 10 Information Checklist 6 10 Connect to an Existing Print Queue pp 6 10 6 11 Verify that LPR Port Monitor is Loaded 2212222112 6 11 ee 6 11 Config re th Printer Driv r lt s oaa dira ro a siy Oo Pra qe da ein 6 11 Apple Macintosh pp 6 13 Information CheckliSE 22 5 cnet ate Feb eue her wid Aas Serve n dus 6 13 Install 6 13 Instructions for TOX OS X i cessus chbadei rinier hyre ea e pedes 6 13 PUERO 4 dob dep Atlan arrow mine eran 7 1 Authentication Overview 7 1 Authorization Overview pp 7 1 Network Authentication pp 7 2 Information Checklist 4 2 22 cesset na da nhe epa d xr Recetas 7 2 Authentication Configuration Wizard pp 7 2 Authentication ConFIguraibitss aque wa dd Nac d CR RR RI Roo WV Ras 7 3 Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Solaris suse 7 3 Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 7 4 Authentication Configuration for NDS 6 cee eee eee 7 5 Au
99. Click on the Apply button to accept changes and return to the Default page 13 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 E mail Filing Options Filing options allow you to specify the default e mail file format There are two options e File Format allows user to select the format of the document from either TIFF mTIFF JPEG PDF PDF A or XPS e Searchable Options allows user to select searchable option of searching either Image Only or Searchable Languages 1 Inthe Filing Options area click on the Edit button to specify the default file format options 2 Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page E mail Image Settings Image Settings allow you to select linearized PDF and interleaved XPS images for faster web viewing Note Searchable options are only available when the Searchable File Formats service is enabled Email Image Settings allow you to specify the e mail Image Settings There are two options e PDF amp PDF A Settings allows you to select Optimized for Fast Web Viewing e Searchable XPS PDF amp PDF A Defaults allows you to select the Searchable Options and Text Compression Setting PDF amp PDF A only 1 Inthe E mail Image Settings area click on the Edit button to create compressed image files for faster web viewing and also to select Searchable options 2 Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page
100. ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 System Administrator Guide xerox Ny D 2009 Xerox Corporation All rights reserved Xerox and the sphere of connectivity design are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the US and or other countries Product names and trademarks of other companies are hereby acknowledged Changes are periodically made to this document Changes technical inaccuracies and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions Document Version 1 0 05 09 Table of Contents 1 2202 000 Rc pL 1 1 Xerox ColorQube Serles sedes e rri Reip ni tr esnek retter eds 1 1 C stomer pr bx aa deo E eopESPN T DE nes eden 1 2 2 Device Connecti ias aids dei E IST aRDERI p RsEA EU fd 2 1 Front 0 000000 0 60 headadenand benbv ended 2 1 2 22 Inserting 6 SIM 00 be b aw erede bese e davladeds bor gehen 2 2 23 Initial i ipsos ID teed EA REED MD IPM EUR 2 3 The Welcome Page and Installation Wizards pp 2 3 Complete the Installation Wizard pp 2 4 2 4 Print a Configuration Report to Verify Current Device Settings 2 4 Ethernet Configuration orecchie bed d RUD e dapi Na dee 2 5 Ethernet Port 0 cece cece eee es e 2 5 Setting the Ethernet speed at the device 0 cece cece eee 2 5 Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device 0 2 5 QUICK Setup oeste die btdaunkianieaches ADU RI A ER NOU WINE 2
101. DAP process The default is 389 Specify the LDAP Server environment from the LDAP Server drop down menu In the Optional Information area enter the path to the LDAP objects to limit the LDAP search in the Search Directory Root area The entry should be in base DN format for instance ou people dc xerox dc com System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Select the required radio button under Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server Quite often to simply supply address information for E mail no login is required For authentication purposes however select System to have the device log in to the LDAP server For Login Credentials enter the device s Login Name and Password if required in the boxes provided If SSL encryption is desired check the Enable SSL checkbox under SSL If SSL will be used click the View Trusted SSL Certificates link to view secure certificates that have been uploaded to the device Note If the LDAP Server is operating with encryption enabled you will need the certificate from that server installed on this device Enter your required number for Maximum Number of Search Results This is the maximum number of addresses that will appear which match the search criteria selected by the user Enter the required time to wait for Search Timeout Alternatively you may select Use LDAP Server Timeout If
102. DIOD Standard started 17 Scheduled ODIO Standard complete 8 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security 18 Scheduled ODIO Full started 19 Scheduled ODIO Full complete 20 Scan to Mailbox job 21 Delete File Dir CPSR 22 USB 23 Scan to Home 24 System Configuration Data Changes Event Description The Audit Log contains a maximum list of the last 15 000 activities on the device The activities that are displayed include e System start up and shutdowns e On demand image overwrites completed e Jobs completed e Embedded Fax jobs e Store Files jobs e Accounting information e Workflow Scanning jobs one scan to file audit log entry is recorded for each network destination within the scan job e Server Fax jobs one audit log entry is recorded for each job e E mail jobs one audit log entry is recorded for each SMTP recipient within the job Completion Status The Completion Status column shows the status of jobs and has the following values e comp normal the job completed correctly e comp deleted the job was deleted gt comp terminated the job was cancelled Identify the PC or User To record the user s name in the Audit Log Network Authentication must be configured on the Xerox device IIO Status If IIO Immediate Image Overwrite is enabled this column will show the status of overwrites completed on each job System Administrator Guide 8 7 Securit
103. Drivers 11 The Printer installed screen will appear Select Print a Test Page to verify the printer is installed 12 Select Make this my default Printer if required 13 Click Next 14 Click Finish Create a New Print Queue e Ensure you have the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD delivered with your device e The device must be configured with a valid IP address or host name subnet mask and gateway address e LPD Line Printer Daemon must be enabled on the device Verify that LPR Port Monitor is Loaded Click Start Control Panel and double click Programs and Features Double click Windows Features In the Turn Windows Features on and off window expand the Print Services menu Click on LPR Port Monitor to enable the service Ux VES c Click on OK Your computer may need to restart Add the Printer At your Workstation click on Start then select Control Panel Open the Printers folder Double click on Add Printer Click A printer that is not attached to my computer network printer Click on Next Click Create a new port Select LPR Port from the Type of Port menu and click Next Enter the IP Address of the device Enter a name for the print queue Click on OK 10 Click Have Disk and browse for the CentreWare Print and Drivers CD 11 Select the required driver Click Open and OK 12 Select the printer model from the list 13 Click on Next 14 S
104. ET 4 12 To Edit Xerox or Administrator Support Contact Details 4 12 Other features and Services isses 4 12 Network Installation des aai x Rh ER TR ded 5 1 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 TCP IP Settings 5 2 Configure Static Addressing using the Device pp 5 2 Configure Dynamic Addressing pp 5 4 IPVO LR nese E A E setae enacane aes 5 5 5 6 Supporting LPR Printing 4 5 7 Configure Raw TCP IP Printing ooa sites orae od ge aed PER IUE ane a 5 8 CONT sich REIP 5 9 SNMP 5 10 SSDP Scent TCI Ir eet ery ene Teeny ert torr erty Ts 5 11 Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming Service 5 11 61 RT 5 12 Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing Protocol 4 5 13 Windows XP esie adero the ana ERA AR E nitlos Op eee does n vp ddr s 5 16 Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing 05060 5 18 Configure Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming SEVICE NCC 5 20 Deas 5 22 9 5 22 Enabling AppleTalk on the device 0 5 22 Instructions for Version 10 x OS X cece cece cence eee eens 5 23 Apple Macintosh TCP IP 2 eee een cece eee n ene e ne ees 5 23 Sadeen aretas sak Paces ag 8 bud thud Poe ae a a Sites 5 26 Information Checklist 5 02 0 5 26 Configure NetWare Settings 2 0 0 0 0 cece cece nce e eee esee 5 26 NDPS NEPS cccccucirqaedpages tessa aang o A ee ames H een ey 5 27 AS400 Raw TCP IP Printing
105. G The following step will delete all the XSA accounts set up for your device 10 To delete all user group and general accounts click on the Reset to Default button 11 Click on the OK button to confirm when the All users accounts and usage data will be lost dialog box appears Print a Usage Report 1 At your Workstation open your web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Accounting link Click on the Xerox Standard Accounting link Select Report and Reset in the directory tree co TM Ov Ur Ge 14 ONS Click on the Generate Report button 9 Right click the Right click to download link 10 Select Save Target As 11 Save the XSA Report csv file to your desktop Enable XSA in your Windows Print Driver 1 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes Windows XP or select Settings and then Printers Windows 2000 20003 2 Right click on the printer driver 3 Select Properties 4 Select Configuration System Administrator Guide 19 5 Xerox Standard Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Select Accounting From the Accounting System drop down menu select Xerox Standard Accounting Select Prompt for Every Job if you want users to enter their User and Account ID each t
106. Get More Info link will appear in the left hand pane of the window 3 Click the Get More Info link to go to straight to the device home page You have completed the installation of an IPP port and printer drivers At the Windows 2000 Desktop 1 Right click the My Network Places icon 2 Select Properties 3 Right click on the network connection you want to configure AppleTalk on and then click Properties The Connection Properties dialog box opens 4 Onthe General tab if the AppleTalk Protocol is in the list of installed protocols make sure that it is selected If the AppleTalk protocol is not listed install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft Then return to the next step in this document 5 14 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation o dou so 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Click Start Settings then Printers Double click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard Click Next Click Local Printer Deselect the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer option Click Next Click Create a New Port 11 12 Select AppleTalk Printing Devices and click Next In the Available AppleTalk Printing Devices box click the printer you want to connect to It may be necessary to double click the required Zone to locate the printer Click OK Note You may be asked whether you want to c
107. Home template by pressing the Workflow Scanning button on the Services screen of the user interface The device queries LDAP to acquire the authenticated user s home directory or appends the authenticated user s login name to a predefined network home path Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to installation e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional This is required to access Internet Services to configure Workflow Scanning The Internet Services function is accessed through the embedded HTTP server on the device and allows System Administrators to configure scan settings by using an Internet browser e Workflow Scanning must be enabled on the Xerox device e Network Authentication must be configured on the Xerox device The Authentication server and the server used to file scanned images must belong to same domain Additional Requirements for Scan to Home via LDAP Query e AWindows 2000 2003 server with Active Directory Services ADS must be configured with LDAP Services and available on the network e The LDAP server information must be configured on the Xerox device e The user s Home Folder Location must be set on the ADS server To verify the Home Folder Location at the ADS server go to Administrator Tools and then
108. However the creation of General Accounts is optional General Accounts can be created to identify a subset of a group or project that a user is involved in The XSA Report specifies the numbers of documents produced per group Account example In the example below the administrator creates a Group Account called Finance Department and two General Accounts called Company A Project and Company B Project The administrator adds the user Jane Smith to each account Jane can now record any impressions that she makes at the device to a particular account At the device Jane enters her user ID and selects Company A Project The number of impressions is recorded specifically to the Company A Project The administrator can print an XSA Report which lists the numbers of impressions recorded for each user Group and General Account 1 At your Workstation open your web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Accounting link Click on the Xerox Standard Accounting link Select General Accounts in the directory tree to create a new general account ov ur B In the Account ID field enter an ID for the new general account for example 002 The General Account can be numeric values up to a maximum of 12 digits General A
109. IP Address is selected enter the IP address of the server where the software upgrade file obtained earlier is located in the File Server IP Address field and if Host Name is selected enter the Host Name in the Host Name field Enter the path to the upgrade file on the server in the Directory Path field Enter the Login Name and Password for the server retype the password Click on the Apply button to accept the changes The upgrade will now be performed automatically on the device at the time specified Once the upgrade process starts network connectivity with the device will be unavailable including access from Internet Services The upgrade progress can be monitored from the device screen interface You have completed the steps to automatically upgrade the device software System Administrator Guide 3 19 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 3 20 System Administrator Guide CentreWare Internet Services This chapter explains how to enable and use the Internet Services feature of the device The Internet Services feature uses the embedded HTTP Server on the device This allows you to communicate with the device through a web browser and gives you access to the Internet or intranet Entering the IP Address of the device as the URL Universal Resource Locator in the browser provides direct access to the device Internet Services not only allow you to change basic settings as in the Control Panel but also allows you
110. Internet Fax on page 14 1 From a desktop e mail client send a test e mail to the new e mail account created on the SMTP server for the device Log in to the mail server with the new account name and password to verify that the e mail was received at the server System Administrator Guide 24 5 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Note A webmail application makes a convenient tool to use to log in to the mail server to check for the receipt of e mail Has the Internet Fax e mail been received at the SMTP server SMTP items to check e Is the device s account name and password correct gt Isthe mail server down e Ask the SMTP administrator to confirm that no errors were encountered and check for bounce messages to the device s Reply To address e Check that the message size does not exceed the attachment or message size limit policy of your SMTP server e Check that the mail server is configured to accept SMTP mail as not all servers are configured to accept SMTP e mail The device requires access to a mail server that is configured for SMTP e Check for restricted host addresses at the SMTP server Verify that the device is not a restricted host e Troubleshoot the network path to the SMTP server It may be necessary to perform a network trace analysis POP3 Errors If you are experiencing problems with receiving Internet Fax messages at the device verify the POP3 address details have been properly configured
111. Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol has been loaded 00h Install the Printer Driver 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes Windows XP The Vista path is Start Control Panel Printer s Double click the Add Printer icon and click Next Verify that Network Printer is selected and click Next The Locate Your Printer Windows 2000 or Specify a Printer Windows XP screen will appear To create an IPP printer select Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet Type HTTP followed by the printer s fully qualified Domain name or IP address in the URL field The Printer Name can be either the Host Name or the SMB Host Name as shown on the device configuration report depending on the name resolution used by your network WINS or DNS 7 Click Next 8 Select Have Disk and browse to the location of the printer driver INF 9 Click OK to install the printer driver 10 Select the Printer Model and Click Next 11 Select Yes if you wish to make this the default printer Qv E E 12 Select Yes to print a Test Page Verify that it prints at the device 13 Click Finish Internet Services Once installed an IPP printer should provide a link directly to the Internet Services web pages To Access Internet Services 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers 2 Click on the device printer icon and a
112. Mode ECM Initial transmission speed will be 33 600 Bits Per Second bps Forced 4800 bps Used in areas of low quality communication when experiencing telephone noise or when fax connections are susceptible to errors 4800 bps is a slower transmission rate but is less susceptible to errors In some regional areas the use of 4800 bps is restricted 31 Click on the required resolution from the Fax Resolution drop down menu 32 If you want to send your fax at a specific time click on the Send At and enter the time in the next 24 hours that you want the device to send your fax 33 If your telephone system requires Fax users to enter a prefix in front of fax numbers click on the Dialling Prefix checkbox and enter the prefix in the box 34 If your call requires a Charge Code number for billing purposes click on Credit Card checkbox and enter the details for the charge code in the box Setup Phone book Preferences 35 Click on Preferences 36 If you have more than one phonebook configured you can specify which phonebook to use as the default from the Default Phonebook menu Personal Phonebook The Personal Phonebook is created when you add fax numbers on the Fax Recipients tab The Personal Phonebook is automatically saved to your PC to a file called default pb To view the Personal Phonebook click on the Select File next to Personal Phonebook select and open the default pb file Click on Open next to
113. New Action button a new page will display allowing you to add the new action In the IP Action Details area enter details in the Action Name field Enter details in the Description area In the Keying Method area select either Manual Keying or Internet Key Exchange IKE If you select Internet Key Exchange IKE enter details in the Pre shared Key Passphrase Note Only one Action may be created when selecting Internet Key Exchange IKE Keying Method 8 14 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security 9 Click on the Next button to display the Step 2 of 2 screen If you Selected Manual Keying as the Keying Method 1 Inthe Mode Selections area select the IPsec Mode from the drop down menu the default Mode is Transport Mode 2 Inthe Security Selections area select preferred option and enter the required informations 3 Click on the Save button If you Selected Internet Key Exchange IKE as the Keying Method 1 Inthe IKE Phase 1 area for Key Lifetime enter Key Lifetime details and select required option from the DH Group drop down menu and check the required Hash Encrypt boxes 2 Inthe IKE Phase 2 area select mode from the IPSec Mode drop down menu a If you select Tunnel Mode then select either Disabled IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address b Ifyouselect IPv4 Address or IPv6 Address enter IP Address details 3 Select type of security from the IPsec Security drop down
114. Obtain the domain name of your SMTP mail server At your Workstation 1 Openthe web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Services link 6 Click on the Server Fax link 7 Select Fax Repository Setup in the directory tree 8 Select SMTP from the Protocol drop down menu 9 Enter details in the Domain field 10 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Configure General Settings 1 Select Default in the directory tree 2 To print a Confirmation Sheet after every Server Fax job click on the Edit button in the General section then select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the success or failure of the Server Fax job If the fax is successful the location of the document on the fax server is also specified 3 Checkthe User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log is filed in the fax repository with the fax job 4 Click on the Apply button to accept changes 5 Other settings such as Server Fax has the following setting that can be adjusted 2 Sided Scanning Content Type How Original was Produced and Resolution Image Quality has the following setting that can be adjusted Lighten Darken and Suppression
115. Personal Phonebook on the Preferences tab Shared Phonebook The Shared Phonebook is a list of fax numbers and recipient details that has been saved to a network drive for more than one person to use To access a shared phonebook 1 Click on the Select File next to Shared Phonebook and locate the default pb shared phonebook file on your network 2 Click on Open next to Shared Phonebook to view the phonebook User Preferences 3 If you want to be notified when you add duplicate recipients to the phonebook select the Prompt When Adding Duplicate Recipients option 4 If you want to be notified when you delete a recipient from the phonebook select the Prompt When Removing a Recipient option 5 If you want to always use the Current Recipient List click on the Always Use Current Recipient List checkbox If you want to use the current Cover Sheet notes click on the Always Use Current Cover Sheet Notes Click on OK when you have finished making your selections Click on OK to close the Fax window Click on OK on the Paper Output tab to send your fax The document will fax with the specified settings Qo oo cM 10 Check that the recipient received the fax 16 4 System Administrator Guide Reprint Saved Jobs Reprint Saved Job is a feature that allows users to store documents into folders located on the device Reprint Saved Job enables you to retrieve jobs which have been stored on the device usin
116. Place the controller box on the floor at the back of the device e Ensure that SSL Secure Sockets Layer is configured on the Xerox device via Internet Services e To configure Authorization locally the Local User Information Database must be configured For instructions refer to the Local User Information Database section within the System Administration CD1 There must be a mapping between the accounts created on the Authentication Server and the System Administrator Guide 21 1 Xerox Secure Access ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Local User Information Database the user names must match so that the device can cross reference each user as they log in at the device e To configure Remote Authorization the LDAP server must be configured on the device and Authorization Access configured For instructions refer to the LDAP section within the System Administration CD1 There must be a mapping between the accounts created on the Authentication Server and the LDAP server the user names must match so that the device can cross reference each user as they log in at the device Access Authentication Configuration 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Right
117. Port or the Host Name and Port of the server where the software upgrade file obtained earlier is located Enter the path to the upgrade file on the server in the Directory Path field Enter the Login Name and Password for the server Click on the Apply button to accept the changes upgrade will now be performed automatically on the device at the time specified Once the upgrade ess starts network connectivity with the device will be unavailable including access from Internet ices The upgrade progress can be monitored from the device screen interface Note Software Installation will begin several minutes after the software file has been submitted to the device Once Installation has begun all Internet Services from this device will be lost including this web user interface The installation progress can be monitored from the local user interface System Administrator Guide Server Fax The Server Fax feature enables users to send documents to one or more fax devices via the telephone network without having a dedicated telephone line connected to the device This is achieved by providing a network fax server with its own links to the telephone system The device requires the Internet Server Fax Kit to be installed and a network connection to a Xerox certified third party server fax solution to enable Server Fax Refer to your Xerox Sales Representative for further information This section contains instructions to configure a fax
118. S ENG ee Ds 17 2 Greate New Folder cerro eere rependere err p ER ERAS 17 2 22 17 3 saving QUOD soto ven MULA UE MUN D C Sd cu 17 3 Using the Print Driver siete eret Ie hene adie he e RR 17 4 Using CentreWare Internet Services pp 17 4 Custom SENV CES 2 05 exci opinor puis d aed 18 1 Validation OPTIONS i i eerie en betpRecA IHE e ee ON DEFOD DECEDERE 18 1 Enable Validation Options 0 18 1 WSD Web Services for Devices pp 18 1 Enable WSD Web Services for Devices 0 18 2 Xerox Standard Accounting 19 1 Information Checklist 4 4 rennan r rrenen 19 1 Enable Xerox Standard Accounting pp 19 2 Using XSA at the device 2 0 ec cece cnn nce e 19 3 Create a General ACCOUNt s cases e oprR SORT DOERUE EE ARS EDU PUE AS PAY DURS 19 4 AccounEexanmple 2 2 o oes eni Ux eS A OHRMODLADMU SURE DEC HER P fantS 19 4 Enable XSA in your Windows Print Driver 4 19 5 Enable XSA in your Apple Macintosh Print Driver pp 19 6 Network ACCOUNUING ess qb b 0 23 ER norant d 20 1 Informati n CHOERUSE uad wi ea en aby laedu onda Pec Sa P dnos eS QNS 20 1 Enable and Configure Network Accounting pp 20 1 To Enable the Network Accounting feature at the Device 20 2 999 20 2 Enable Network Accounting in your Windows Print Driver 20 3 Enable Network Accounting in your Mac Print 6 20 3 Xerox Secure 0 ES 21 1 Secure Access and Accounting pp 21 1 Information Checklist pp 21 1 Ac
119. Select System to have the system log into the server or Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine access 23 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Server Fax 14 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Configure General Settings 1 Select Default in the directory tree 2 To print a Confirmation Sheet after every Server Fax job click on the Edit button in the General section then select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the success or failure of the Server Fax job If the fax is successful the location of the document on the fax server is also specified 3 Checkthe User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log is filed in the fax repository with the fax job 4 Click on the Apply button to accept changes 5 Other settings such as Server Fax has the following setting that can be adjusted 2 Sided Scanning Content Type How Original was Produced and Resolution Image Quality has the following setting that can be adjusted Lighten Darken and Suppression Layout Adjustment has the following setting that can be adjusted Original Orientation and Original Size Filing Options has the following setting that can be adjusted Delay Start 6 Tochange any feature settings within each setting area click on the Edit button select the feature to be changed and click on the Save button toreturn
120. Template on page 10 11 Login Source settings control user access to a pool of templates stored on a remote server Communications to the server including entry of the required device Login Name and Password are set up by clicking on the Advanced link then selecting Template Pool Setup in the directory tree in the Internet Services directory tree Select Authenticated User to have the Authentication Server control remote template pool access Select Prompt at User Interface to have a standalone server prompt device users for access This works well for small offices without an Authentication server Select Prompt if Authenticated User Does Not Match Template Owner to prompt authenticated users accessing templates containing either no or other users owner names Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job Click Apply Go to the Device 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Touch the Workflow Scanning icon on the touch screen Touch All Templates Select All Templates from the All Templates drop down menu Select Advance Setting tab Touch the Update Template icon Touch Update Now Touch Confirm touch Use Partial List Touch Close Touch the Workflow Scanning tab Select the Default template and place a document in the document handler
121. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Server Fax If you are experiencing problems with sending a Server Fax first verify the device is connected on the network and functioning as a printer by performing the following activities e Check the network cable at the back of the device e Sendatest page from your PC to the device e If connected via TCP IP try a PING from your workstation to the device Note Server Fax and Embedded Fax are mutually exclusive services If one is enabled the other will not function Perform the steps under Is the Fax button available on the device below to check which service is enabled Is the Device Functioning on the Network as a Printer Configure your device on the network or resolve any networking issues before attempting to use the Server Fax feature For instructions to configure the device on the network see Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 Ensure Server Fax is Installed Correctly At the device verify that you have a Fax button on the device screen interface and that this is not grayed out and unselectable You may need to press the Services button to view the Fax button on screen Is the Fax Button Available on the Device Install Server Fax before proceeding For instructions refer to Server Fax on page 23 1 Note If you have installed Server Fax but the button is grayed out or the service is unavailable at the device press the Log In Out button Enter the Administra
122. Workflow Scanning E mail or Internet Fax Settings 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on either Workflow Scanning E mail or Internet Fax link de oq For Workflow Scanning select Default Template in the directory tree then click on the Edit button within the Filing Options area Select the Searchable radio button under Searchable Options 8 For E mail or Internet Fax select Defaults then select the Edit button within Filing Options Select the Searchable radio button under Searchable Options within Document Format as the user presented scanning default 9 When done click on the Apply button to save changes or Undo to remove changes and refresh the page Internationalization The Internet Services Internationalization screen allows administrators to specify the locale where the device is situated This is used to determine the type of coding used by the device to interpret data such as print jobs 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The defaul
123. Xerox Secure Access provides a means of authenticating users via an authentication server and optional card reader This convenient security solution allows people to simply swipe the ID card at the device to unlock access to features that can be tracked for accounting and regulatory requirements Secure Access and Accounting Secure Access can be enabled with the Network Accounting Xerox Standard Accounting and Workflow Scanning features to provide accounting functionality Note Secure Access cannot be enabled at the same time as Foreign Device Interface Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the Xerox device is fully functional on the network TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be configured so that Internet Services can be accessed e Ensure the Xerox Secure Access authentication server is installed and configured with user accounts Refer to the documentation with the authentication server to complete this task Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you do not have the Xerox Secure Access authentication server Note There must be a mapping between the accounts created on the authentication server and accounts created in the Local User Information Database or remote Authentication server see steps 4 and 5 e Connect and configure your card reader if required Attach the card reader to the left hand shelf on the device
124. a 4 10 digit number which you will use at the device s user interface to release the document for printing e Sample Set if several copies of the document have been selected one copy only will print to allow the reader to check for errors Once validated the remaining copies can be released from the device s user interface e Save Job for Reprint the document will be saved for reprinting e Delayed Print specify a time for your document to print 6 Select the required Printing options for 2 Sided Printing Output Color Collate Orientation Staple and Output Destination System Administrator Guide 4 5 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 If Network Accounting is installed then enter your Account and User ID for accounting purposes The Accounting fields are only visible if accounting is enabled on your device Note Printing options are only valid for jobs that do not contain the settings already 7 When finished with your selections click on the Submit Job button to send your document to the printer Wait for the Job Submission confirmation window to appear before exiting or navigating to a different screen so your print job will not be deleted 8 Retrieve the printed document s from the device Properties This tab allows you to view and set the device properties These include the device details and configuration Internet Services settings the port settings protocol settings emulation setting
125. a network connection using Internet Services via a web browser e Auto upgrade 1 Software Upgrade via Network Connection If your device is connected to the network it is possible to upgrade the software through Internet Services The device will need to be configured for TCP IP and HTTP 2 Auto Upgrade If performing a software upgrade on the device via Internet Services it is possible to set the Auto Upgrade feature to schedule automatic device software upgrades from a central server at a specific time on a regular basis To determine whether your device has a network connection print a Configuration Report as follows 1 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close woe ws System Administrator Guide 22 1 Software Upgrade ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Upgrade via Internet Services Note This procedure will delete any current jobs in the device print queue and prevent further jobs from printing until the upgrade has completed If you wish to preserve these jobs allow them to complete before upgrading your software All configured network settings and installed options will be retained by the device after the Software Upgrade process Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items is available or has been performed e Obtain the new software upgra
126. a printer attached to another computer is selected and click Next System Administrator Guide 6 7 Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 8 The Specify a Printer screen will appear Click Next to browse for the print queue created on your server or if you know the name of the server and printer click Connect to this printer and enter the server and printer name details 9 Select the printer and click Next 10 Decide whether or not you want to make this printer your default printer then click Next 11 Click Finish The printer will download to the Windows XP workstation 12 Once the printer driver has installed open an application on the workstation and print a test page to verify operation Configure the Print Driver 1 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes The Windows XP path is Start Control Panel Printers and Faxes 2 Right click on the printer icon and select Properties Use the available tabs to set the printing defaults Additional settings may be accessed by clicking the Printing Preferences button on the General tab Create a New Print Queue on Windows XP Obtain the Print Driver for your operating system Verify that Print Services for UNIX is loaded from the Start menu select Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs Select Add Remove Windows Components Scroll down until you see Other Network File and Print Services Click the Details button Check the box t
127. ab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select AppleTalk in the directory tree Doom ow 5 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 8 Checkthe Enabled box to enable the Protocol 9 Typea name for the device in Printer Name The default name is XRX_MAC address Note The default local zone is identified as This should only be changed if you have defined zones on your network 10 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values 11 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you reboot the device Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing Protocol Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 so that the web user interface Internet Services can be accessed e Ensure that the DNS settings are configured Enable Port 9100 as additional support for HTTP IPP printing 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Addres
128. access select the None radio button If the mail account does require a password select the System radio button then enter the SMTP Server account name and password where shown If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on Login Click on the Apply button to implement any changes Configure General E mail Settings 24 25 26 Click on the Services link Click on the E mail link Select Defaults in the directory tree General Bep Hy c 10 11 In the General area click on the Edit button To change the e mail From Address enter a valid e mail address Optional Step Enter a From Name If LDAP is configured select the required option next to the Allow Authenticated Users to Edit From Field when Address Book LDAP Search Successful Users can edit the From field when the LDAP server finds the user s address Address Book LDAP Search Failure Users can edit the From field when the LDAP server did not find the user s address Address Book LDAP Search Not Performed Users can edit the From field when the LDAP server has not been accessed Click on Yes next to Edit From Field when Authentication is not Required if users can edit the From field when authentication is not enabled on the device In the Message Body section enter text that you want to appear as default in the body of e mails s
129. address for Alternate DNS Servers 1 and 2 14 Checkthe box to enable Dynamic DNS Registration DDNS If your DNS Server does not support dynamic updates there is no need to enable DDNS 15 Checkthe Enable box under DHCP DDNS Release Registration ONLY if you wish to release this device s IP address upon reboot Default is unchecked 5 16 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 16 Check the Enabled box for Self Assigned Address under Zero Configuration Networking to support communicating with other devices using 169 254 16 IPv4 addressing over the same physical or logical link such as in ad hoc or isolated non DHCP networks Refer to the IETF website for zeroconf details 17 Check the Enabled box for Multicast DNS to resolve host names to IPv4 addresses without using a conventional DNS server Supporting LPR Printing 18 Select LPR LPD in the directory tree 19 Check the Enabled box to enable LPR LPD Configure SLP if needed to support CUPS Mac OS and NetWare 20 Select SLP in the directory tree 21 Check the Enabled box to enable Service Location Protocol SLP 22 Enter an IP address for the Directory Agent if required 23 Enter the required name s for Scope 1 2 3 24 Select the Message type from the drop down list for Multicast or Broadcast 25 Enter a value for Multicast Radius 0 255 26 Enter a value for MTU to set the Maximum Transmission U
130. al step enter a Line Name for the device by touching Line Name and using the on screen keyboard to enter a maximum of 30 characters Select the required option for the line by touching one of the buttons as follows under Options Send and Receive the device is capable of sending and receiving fax transmissions Send Only the device is only capable of sending faxes Receive Only the device is only capable of receiving faxes Touch Save to exit the Line Setup screen Touch Log In Out to exit the Tools pathway and the device will reboot with the new settings Test the fax connection by sending a fax document Press the Services button Touch the Fax icon Enter the number of a nearby fax device using the keypad Place your documents in the document handler and press the Start button Verify that your documents are received at the other fax device You have completed the embedded fax setup For detailed information about other embedded fax features refer to the Training and Information CD2 delivered with your device 15 4 System Administrator Guide LAN Fax LAN Local Area Network Fax enables users to send documents to fax devices directly from their computers Once enabled users select the Fax option from their printer driver The LAN fax option requires the Embedded Fax Kit to be fitted to the device Information Checklist Make sure that you have installed the Embedded Fax as stated in the Embedded Fax s
131. ample Workflow Scanning will not be available until the device is set to Online IX Ov Ur E Note To enable the device to receive or send jobs over the network touch the Online button 8 Touch Close 9 Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Auxiliary Foreign Device Interface Kit A third party access and accounting device such as a coin operated device or a card reader can be attached to the device To enable this option the Foreign Device Interface Kit must be installed After the kit is installed the administrator must enable Auxiliary Access as the Accounting Mode from the Tools menu of the device as follows 1 Pressthe Log In Out gt button Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button Touch the Tools tab Touch Accounting Settings Touch Accounting Mode Select Auxiliary Access and select available buttons to configure your device Once selected touch Save OY rw nN 4 Press the Log In Out gt button then touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway For further instructions on Auxiliary Foreign Device Interface Setup options refer to the Interactive User Guide delivered with your device SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol It is possible to remotely define and modify GET SET and TRAP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol com
132. an compression is a lossless algorithm ideal for compressing text LZ77 works well with files containing lots of repetitive data such as text and monochrome image TIFF and GIF files Flate compression is a standard feature of PDF files that Acrobat works well with 3 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup XPS Settings XPS is Microsoft s new electronic paper format an alternative to PDF XPS is currently supported as a saved file format in Microsoft Office 2007 with an XPS viewer built into Windows Vista Microsoft states that Windows vista uses the XPS format as a document format a windows spool file format and a page description language for printers Select Optimized for Fast Web Viewing also known as Interleaved XPS or Enable MRC Compression for the same reasons stated above for PDF files Note Regarding Searchable XPS If this option is available by enabling the selection you will provide Workflow Scanning E mail and Internet Fax users with the ability to choose Searchable as an option for their XPS file format The Searchable Format provides a second layer of data with the text of the scanned document The second layer is converted to an optical character readable format enabling the text of the document to be searched on copied and pasted as desired Accessing Image Settings 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and pre
133. apture the AppleTalk print device If you are prompted to do this and you are unsure how to respond click the Help button and read the help file for an explanation of capturing AppleTalk print devices Capturing the printer may prevent other computers from printing to this printer For more information refer to Microsoft Click Have Disk Load the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD into your CD drive Click Browse and locate the CD drive Locate the folder containing printer drivers on the CD and select the required Windows 2000 printer driver Select Open Select Open again if necessary Select OK Select your printer model from the list and click Next Type a name for the printer or accept the default name and then click Next If you want this to be your default printer click Yes Click Next If you want to share this printer from your computer click Share As Enter a share name or accept the default name then click Next If you want to print a test page click Yes then click Finish System Administrator Guide 5 15 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Windows XP Configure TCP IP and SLP Settings 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Note TCP IP and HTTP should have been initially configured refer to Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 of this guide and follow the steps provide
134. are Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Macintosh System Administrator Guide 5 25 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 NetWare Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedures please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e An existing operational NetWare network e Login to a NetWare file server tree as Supervisor Administrator or have the equivalent privileges e Ensure the device is connected to the network via Ethernet cable e Set up a print server object using NWADMIN Refer to the documentation supplied by Novell to complete this task Record precisely observe upper and lower case dot notation the NDS Tree NDS Context Name frame type Print Server Name and the Print Server password assigned If your printer services queues on multiple file servers the Print Server name and password must be the same on all file servers Configure NetWare Settings 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab wS If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select NetWare in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable NetWare protocol Select the required Filing Transport drop down menu 99 oy on so Select t
135. area click on the View button for Service Registration 20 Onthe Service Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 21 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 22 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right System Administrator Guide 7 7 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 23 24 25 26 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu Click on the Apply button Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS 1 9o Noy a me 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 7 8 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the L
136. as the E mail Settings Correctly Configured For instructions refer to E mail on page 13 1 From a desktop e mail client send a test e mail to the new e mail account created on the SMTP server for the device Log in to the mail server with the new account name and password to verify that the e mail was received at the server Note A webmail application makes a convenient tool to use to log in to the mail server to check for the receipt of e mail Was E mail Received at the SMTP Server While logged in to the device s e mail account on the SMTP server forward the e mail to yourself If you receive the forwarded e mail you have verified that a valid path exists for receiving and forwarding e mail using the device s account If there is still a problem check for restricted host addresses at the SMTP server that could cause mail to not be received from the device Other possibilities are that an authentication server is interfering with the device s log in to the mail server or that the mail client on the device is not working correctly By successfully sending e mail to a mail server not subject to authentication the possibility of a malfunctioning client can be eliminated e Is the device s account name and password correct e Is the mail server down e Check that the mail server is configured to accept SMTP mail as not all servers are configured to accept SMTP e mail The device requires access to a mail server that accepts inbou
137. ast Web Viewing if you want to create linearized PDF files e Linearized files allow single pages of a PDF file to be displayed in a web browser before the entire file is downloaded This function is recommended if your user create large PDFs which are designed to be delivered to web browsers over the Internet e Large PDF files include those with several pages or contains lots of text and graphics You can also select Optimized for Fast Web Viewing if users scan to a document management system This option will reduce the time users have to wait to view PDF files downloaded from the document management system Note If you enable Optimized for Fast Web Viewing here it will automatically enable the Optimized for Fast Web Viewing option in both E mail and Internet Fax Default Image Settings screens For JBIG2 check the enable box option s for Arithmetic Encoding and or Huffman Encoding if you want to use JBIG2 compression JBIG2 is used for monochrome images and or text within MRC images JBIG2 will compress text smaller than Group 4 G4 compression although it takes longer to process JBIG2 exports PDF files as version 1 4 PDF Check the enable box for Flate Compression if you want to add additional lossless compression to any JPEG compression performed by the device Check the enable box for MRC Compression Format Mixed Raster Content if you want to use MRC compression to create PDF or PDF A files MRC is used to divide the scann
138. at says Properties have been successfully modified Configure Raw TCP IP Printing Note TCP IP must be enabled before Raw TCP IP Printing is enabled Raw TCP IP is a printing method used to open a TCP socket level connection over Port 9100 to stream a print ready file to the printer s input buffer and then to close the connection after sensing an End Of Job indicator in the Page Description Language or after expiration of a preset timeout value Port 9100 printing does not require a Line Printer Request LPR from the workstation or the use of a Line Printer Daemon LPD running on the printer Raw TCP IP printing is selected in Windows 2000 as the Standard TCP IP port 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address or Location field Press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 5 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation tO oy or 12 13 14 15 16 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing Protocol Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 If two additional ports are available click Default All to see if they set to 9101 and 9102 respectivel
139. ately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time Create an IPP Printer Internet Printing Protocol Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed 1 Ensure TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 so that the web user interface Internet Services can be accessed 2 Ensurethat the DNS settings are configured Enable Port 9100 as additional support for HTTP IPP printing 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 If two additional ports are available click Default All to see if they set to 9101 and 9102 respectively emulating HP JetDirect EX Plus 3 10 Leave the Bidirectional and Maximum Connections settings at their default values Moo Ge oJ NJ 11 Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job
140. atus Pathway and Service Pathway such as Color Copy Reprint Saved Jobs Workflow Scanning E mail Internet Fax and Fax Users of the device will be asked to provide a User Name and Password to be validated by the designated authenticated server If this validation is successful the options which were previously locked will be available for individual use Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed gt Ensure the device is fully functional on the network e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional This is required to access Internet Services to configure Network Authentication Internet Services function is accessed through the embedded HTTP server on the device and allows System Administrators to configure Authentication settings by using an Internet browser e Ensure the Authentication Server to be used is functional on your network and refer to your manufacturer s documentation for instructions to complete this task Authentication Configuration Wizard Admin Password Initially when Access Right is selected the Authentication Configuration Wizard will display The first part of the Authentication Configuration Wizard is the Device System Administrator Password screen you will be prompted to change the System Administrator Password The System Administrator password is used to access Too
141. ault page Internet Fax Receive Settings 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Click Internet Receive Settings in the directory tree In the Filter Options section check the Accept E mail with no attachment box if required Check the boxes according to the file types of attachments that can be accepted under the Accept the following attachments In the Finishing Options section select the required setting from the drop down menu for Stapling and 2 Sided Printing drop down menu In the Receipt Options section check the Send Confirmation reply when requested allow device to send MDN box if required Check the Print Cover Sheet with incoming E mail messages box if required Click on the Apply button to implement any changes and click on OK At the Device 31 32 33 34 35 36 Press the Services button touch the Internet Fax icon Touch New Recipient button then touch To button Enter an internet fax recipient address Touch the Add button then touch Close The e mail address will appear in the Address List Place a document to fax in the document handler and press the Start button Verify the recipient receives the document at the internet fax address 14 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Internet Fax The From Address The Internet Fax From address is the e mail Address entered for the device when the POP3 address details were configured and is n
142. ay edit this value at the device user interface screen To add a new Document Management field 10 Click on the Add button in the Document Management Fields box 11 Enter a name for the field and provide a label and default value if required 12 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Other Options You can configure a variety of settings for your scanned images including e Advanced Settings e Layout Adjustment e Filing Options e Report Options e Workflow Scanning Image Settings Compression Capability For further information click the Help button at the top of the Internet Services screen 1 change the settings click Edit in the appropriate area 2 Select the appropriate options 3 Click Apply to accept the changes Workflow Scanning Image Settings The Workflow Scanning Image Settings screen allows you to create compressed image files for faster web viewing and also to select Searchable options System Administrator Guide 10 13 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Note Searchable options are only available when the Searchable File Formats service is enabled Click on the Edit button in the Workflow Scanning Image Settings area In the Fast Web Viewing Options area select Linearized PDF or Interleaved XPS if required Linearized files allow single pages of a PDF to be displayed in a web browser before the entire file is downloaded Interleaved XPS documents are also
143. base from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Local User Information Database Click on the Add New User button in the User Identification area enter details of the new user in the User Name Friendly Name Password and Retype Password fields In the User Role area select either one of the three radio button Click on the Add New User button to add the user then press the Close button to return to the Authentication Configuration page Note You can also Edit user credentials as well as Delete users from the User Information Database screen Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 14 15 16 In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration On the Service Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 17 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 7 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 18 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock
144. be grayed out if Network Accounting is not enabled If accounting is enabled select Automatically apply Accounting Codes from the server if the Secure Access Server has been configured to return the accounting User ID and Account ID login If you want the user to enter these values at the local user interface during login select User must manually enter accounting codes at the device 21 Under the Device Instructional Blocking Window heading enter text in the Window Title and Instructional Text boxes to create the prompt that will be displayed on the device s user interface informing users how to authenticate themselves at the device Note If the Title and Prompt have been configured on the Secure Access Server then this information will override the Title and Prompt text entered here 22 Click Save when done Enable Web User Interface Authentication A second networked Authentication Server will be necessary for web user interface Authentication if this feature is additionally desired Full instructions for configuring network authentication using Kerberos NDS SMB and LDAP LDAPS are contained in the Network Authentication section of this guide The path to the Authentication Server configuration screen is 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The
145. ber If you need to enter information touch the Keyboard Access button and enter your login information 3 The screen may request further information such as a primary PIN or password or account information The primary PIN may have been set on the Xerox Secure Access authentication server The account information may be requested because an accounting option is configured on the device 4 The Xerox device will confirm successful authentication and you will now have access to the features 5 When you have finished using the features press the Clear All button on the keypad to close your account System Administrator Guide 21 5 Xerox Secure Access ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 21 6 System Administrator Guide Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade feature allows the customer to upgrade the device software as requested by a Xerox Customer Support Center Representative without needing a Customer Service Representative to be present When Should I Upgrade the Software Xerox is continually seeking to improve its products and a software revision may become available to improve functionality on the device Your Customer Support Center Representative will instruct you to upgrade your device when it is necessary How Do I Upgrade the Software IMPORTANT Any jobs in the queue must be allowed to complete or be deleted before initiating a software upgrade There are two methods for upgrading the software on the device e Over
146. blement ensure it is enabled and touch Save 18 Touch Close 19 Press the Log In Out gt button 20 Touch Logout to exit the Tools pathway Configure Protocols with Internet Services Internet Services is a series of web pages hosted on the embedded HTTP server of the device allowing configuration of services and settings using a web browser Refer to the Protocols section of this guide and follow the instructions to configure protocols To configure individual protocols only using your web browser perform the following steps 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link then click on the Protocols link enu op E Note To see IPv6 addressing parameters if desired click IP Internet Protocol in the list of Protocols then click on IP v6 6 Select your individual protocol of interest from the displayed list and modify settings to your requirements System Administrator Guide 2 9 Device Connection ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Configure additional purchased options Refer to the Options section of this guide and follow the instructions provided Note If you are installing multiple devices on your network you may find the Cloning featur
147. browser search to find examples Click on the Apply button when done Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Configure Contexts for LDAP Contexts are used with the Authentication feature The administrator can configure the device to automatically add an authentication context to the Login Name provided by the user 1 If you are continuing from Step 31 in the previous procedure Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS click on Contexts heading tab under the LDAP title If you have already logged out of Internet Services or closed your browser at a networked workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address or Location field Press Enter Click the Properties tab 7 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocol link Select LDAP in the directory tree Click on Contexts heading tab under the LDAP title 10 Enter details in the Default Login Context box provided 11 Click on the Apply button 12 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 13 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen
148. bui becd pAb ee nents 13 5 Configuring Public and Internal Address Books LDAP 4 13 5 EDAP Addressing 25i ril e ppp eR RR UR E Xe ine eR Pedes 13 6 Public Address BOOK os cn tuners enna nheewns culate tenes amine 13 8 temet POE 4 ARHU IHE aeen oer een ins eves ide 14 1 Using Mixed Size Originals 0 cece cece 14 1 Internet Fax Addressing 4 14 1 Internet Fax Authentication and 2 0 14 1 Information Checklist esses 14 2 Enable Internet GE 14 2 Configure a Domain Name and SMTP Address pp 14 2 Embedded FO iiduas 60505440405 Carnes ha o wos 15 1 Server Fax and Embedded Fax 15 1 System Administrator Guide vii 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 viii ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Information Checklist 15 1 Complete the Fax Setup Screens 4 15 2 90 15 3 15 3 LAN FOX TNNT EE T TT 16 1 Information Checklist pp 16 1 Enable LAN Fax Windows Printer Drivers 7 16 1 Configure the Printer Driver Automatically pp 16 1 Configure the Printer Driver Manually pp 16 2 5 60 2 0 a 16 2 Windows At your Workstation pp 16 2 Mac OS US8rs iir tbt eee theo ERUPTIONE DR EAR 16 2 Reprint Saved JoDsa ius 4 were 4 RAM RE ARES 17 1 Checklist ios ese eo ECCE RR 078 b 17 1 Enable Reprint Saved Jobs pp 17 1 Enable Reprint Saved Jobs in your Printer 5 17 2 Mariage Folders eie Et epa bah anda RARU
149. button to save your changes System Administrator Guide 4 9 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Extensible Service Setup Extensible Service Setup utilizes web based services to enable users to access services Extensible Service Setup enables independent software vendors and partners to develop customized programs to access directly from the device Users can enter their User ID at the device and access a set of features and options designed specifically for their business needs Note Before Extensible Service Setup is enabled HTTP SSL and Extensible Service Registration must be configured Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Extensible Service Setup link in the directory tree SX OY urbs c Check the Export password to Extensible Browser box to select the required feature in the Enable Custom Services area 8 Inthe Browser Settings area check to select either or both options Enable the Extensible Services Browser and or Verify server certificates box 9 Click the Apply button Alert Notification Customers can set the Xerox device to notify users or operators of problems as they occur on the device Alert Notification is con
150. ccount ID s must be unique 9 Entera name for the general account in the Account Name field for example Xerox general The general name can be alphanumeric characters to a maximum of 32 characters The General Account name must be unique 10 Click on the Add Account button The account will appear in the General Accounts list 11 To add a user to this account click the Manage link in the General Accounts area 19 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Standard Accounting 12 In the Account area make any relevant changes 13 In the User Access area check the boxes for the Access Right you want the General Account to have access 14 Click on the Save Changes button The user appears as a member of the Group and General Accounts Generate Report and Reset User Limits 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Accounting link Click on the Xerox Standard Accounting link Select Report and Reset in the directory tree To reset all usage data to O click on the Reset Usage Data button 0 09 04 Qv 0 Click on the OK button to confirm when the All current usage data will be rest to zero and lost dialog box appears A WARNIN
151. ccounting button to enable it a Network Accounting Configuration menu will display on the right hand side of the touch screen Touch the Customize Prompt select the required option from the Display Prompt 1 Only drop down menu Touch Prompt 1 Label and enter an ID between 1 and 32 characters and touch Save Touch Prompt 2 Default Value and enter an ID between 1 and 32 characters and touch Save Touch the Mask Entries box to place a tick and touch Save to return to the Accounting Mode screen Touch Code Entry Validation Touch the Enabled button to enable authentication or Disabled to disable authentication Authentication Enabled If you want to track copy print and scan usage by both User ID Account ID and amount of resources each user account uses for example types and sizes of paper stock duplex or simplex stapled or not stapled ensure that Authentication is Enabled Users will then be required to enter a valid User ID and an Account ID for any job The User ID and Account ID are alphanumeric strings between 1 and 32 characters in length Authentication Disabled Disabling Authentication allows the device to accept both valid and invalid User and Account ID s Authentication Disabled is useful if conducting an analysis for the resources used on a particular device before Authentication controls are instituted Users will still be required to enter at least one character into the User and Account ID
152. ccounting Codes and enter the Default User ID and the Default Account ID 10 Click OK 11 Click OK to exit Windows XP Vista 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers 2 Right click on the device printer icon 3 Select Properties 4 Select the Configuration tab 5 Checkthe Enable Accounting box 6 Select Prompt for Every Job if you want users to enter their User and Account ID each time they print 7 You may also select the Mask User ID and Mask Account ID checkboxes to have the asterisk character echoed when this information is entered 8 Otherwise select Use Default Accounting Codes and enter the default user ID and the default account ID 9 Click OK 10 Click OK to exit Enable Network Accounting in your Mac Print Driver Mac OS X BS oan NES Open a document to print and select File and then Print Select the Xerox printer From the Copies and Pages menu select Accounting Select Xerox Network Accounting from the Accounting System menu Select Prompt for Every Job if you want to enter your Network Accounting User and Account ID when you print You may also select the Mask User ID and Mask Account ID checkboxes to hide the user and account ID information Otherwise select Use Default Accounting Codes and enter a default user ID and a default account ID To save your settings select the Presets menu and click Save As System Adminis
153. cess Authentication Configuration pp 21 2 Use Secure ACCeSS ceo secs eed tn ee perpe Me Ee ede pde 21 5 Software Upgrade ise rrt threats 22 1 When Should I Upgrade the Software pp 22 1 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 23 24 How Do I Upgrade the Software 0 cece cece cnn ence ences 22 1 Upgrade via Internet Services 0 ccc cnet enn e 22 2 Informati n CHEB Pr Pr 22 2 System Software Version 42 2 0424 22 2 Auto DDgrade c sce e zo rhet bed e tee 02005059 22 3 Information Checklist escena cab ioH ERE pe es ace b adc sb ai pacia badcdo 22 3 3 ac be cond sec diae PE 23 1 Server Fax and Embedded Fax sa 23 1 Server Fax Authentication and Authorization pp 23 1 Information t EE S 23 1 Enable Server Fax uses esa e RR renea R X RETRO E EEAS 23 2 Configure a Server Fax Filing Location Repository sssuuue 23 2 Configure a Fax Repository using FTP pp 23 2 Configure a Fax Repository using SMB pp 23 4 Configure a Fax Repository using 23 5 Configure a Fax Repository using SMTP pp 23 7 TroubleshoBD 2 4 2000208 24 1 Troubleshooting Workflow Scanning l i 24 1 Is the device functioning on the network asa printer 24 1 Is the Workflow Scanning Button Available on the Device 24 1 Troubleshooting E mail e mes t erret Reto cadee neonate A RS 24 3 Ensure E mail is Installed Correctly pp 24 3 Troubleshooting Internet Fax 2 c eee
154. changes Document Management Fields Optional 10 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning This area enables you to add dota fields to the Default Template This information is filed with your scanned documents in the Job Log The Job Log can then be accessed by third party software and the Document Management Fields information retrieved and associated with the scanned files The following fields are available Click the underlined links for further information Field Name This defines a name for the Document Management data that is to be associated with the scanned job This value is not shown at the device user interface screen and is used by third party software to access the Document Management information It can be up to 128 characters in length This field cannot be left blank Field Label If you would like the user to be able to modify the value of the Field Name select Editable next to User Editable Enter a value in the Field Label field The label should identify the purpose of this field to the user Select Not Editable if the user can not change the Document Management Field s value The user will not be presented with this Document Management Field at the device and the Default Value will be used Default Value This is an optional requirement This value defines the actual data that is to be assigned to that particular scan job This field can be created blank or the user m
155. configured on the device any job that is overwritten will have its overwrite status displayed in the Completed Jobs queue details window To view Overwrite Status at the Device Press the Job Status button Touch the Other Queues button if necessary Touch the All Completed Jobs button Touch a job in the queue View the Immediate Overwrite Status This will appear as Successful or Failed Touch Close uad Wn me System Administrator Guide 8 17 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Disabling or Enabling Immediate Image Overwrite Overwrite Security can be disabled or enabled at any time as follows At the Device Press the Log In Out gt button to access the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter If necessary press the Machine Status button then touch the Tools tab From Tools touch Security Settings Touch Image Overwrite Security then Immediate Overwrite Touch Enable or Disable then touch Save The change in status will be immediately effective UT EC MU NE Press the Log In Out gt button touch Logout to log out of the Tools pathway 8 18 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security On Demand Overwrite Overview The On Demand Overwrite feature provides security conscious customers with the ability to overwrite the device s hard disk to protect classified or private inf
156. connect to the shared folder the scan filing location from another PC with the user account and password created for the device Create a new folder within this location and try to delete it If you cannot perform this function check the user account rights Verify that the information has been properly set in the Internet Services File Repository Setup page Scanning via HTTP S From a TCP IP networked workstation test the connection to the web server by Telnet From a command prompt start a Telnet session log in to the device s directory on the web server and send a POST request and file to the web server Check to see if the file was received at the repository If the file was not received refer to HTTP HTTPS on page 10 8 The fault requires further investigation Refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support Troubleshooting E mail If you are experiencing problems with sending an E mail first verify the device is connected on the network and functioning as a printer by performing the following activities e Check the network cable at the back of the device e Sendatest page from your PC to the device e If connected via TCP IP try a PING from your workstation to the device Configure your device on the network or resolve any networking issues before attempting to use the E mail feature Ensure E mail is Installed Correctly At the device verify that you have an E mail button on the device screen interfac
157. count and password e Test the settings by attempting to connect to the shared folder from another PC by logging in with the user account and password Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights At your Workstation Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Server Fax link Select Fax Repository Setup in the directory tree Select SMB from the Protocol drop down menu Oo 0o N Ov Ua 7 cS Select IP Address or Host Name and enter either IP address and Port number or Host Name and Port number of the computer where the fax filing repository SMB server workstation is located 10 Enter the Port Number if required it is recommended to retain the default setting 11 Enter the Share Name in Share 12 Enter the Document Path as it relates to the share where the fax repository is located in Document Path For example If the path is sharename wc fax enter wc fax in Document Path 13 In the Login Credentials to Access the Destination area select either Authenticated User or System enter the user account and password in the Login Name and Password entry boxes
158. ct your Xerox Sales Representative if you do not have the Scanning Hardware Kit e Locate the Internet Server Fax Subscriber Installation Module SIM To install Server Fax on the device you will need the Internet Server Fax SIM Following the supplied instructions for full details with the device powered on the SIM is inserted into an orange slot on the System Administrator Guide 23 1 Server Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 device s backplane An Options Assist screen pops up to assist with installation Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you do not have the plastic SIM e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 This is required to access the device s Internet Services web pages which can be used to configure E mail settings from a network connected workstation s web browser For instructions on how to configure TCP IP and HTTP refer to Configure Protocols with Internet Services on page 2 9 e Install and configure the Xerox certified fax server solution on your network Refer to the manufacturer s documentation contained with the server fax solution for instructions to complete this task e If the server fax solution uses the TCP IP protocol to communicate it is recommended that the server be assigned a static IP address However dynamic IP Addressing may be used provided DNS settings are fully configured and the DHCP server has been configured wit
159. d Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select IP Internet Protocol in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable the TCP IP protocol d CAUTION Disabling TCP IP or changing the IP Address will affect NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP printing If TCP IP is disabled Internet Services will not be available until TCP IP is enabled from the control panel of the device If you change the IP address you must reference the new address within your web browser to locate the device 99 iy Una Ds d NM 9 Entera unique Host Name for your device 10 Select the desired method for obtaining a Dynamic IP address from the IP Address Resolution drop down list or select Static to give the device a static IP address 11 If you select Static type the IP addresses that apply in Machine IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address Note If BOOTP or DHCP address resolution mode is selected you cannot change the IP address Subnet Mask or default gateway If RARP address resolution mode is selected you cannot change the IP address Select Static if you wish to disable dynamic addressing Domain Name 12 Enter a valid Domain Name DNS Configuration 13 Enter an IP address for the Preferred DNS Server Enter an IP
160. d Settings Touch Continue Touch HTTP Settings and ensure Enable is selected If not touch Enable Touch Save then touch Close to return to the Tools menu DNS DDNS Configuration 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Touch TCP IP Settings Touch DNS Configuration This feature will be inaccessible grayed out if TCP IP protocol is not enabled Touch the Domain Name keyboard button Touch the button under Domain Name Touch the Clear Text button to remove the default name before entering the new name using the on screen keyboard Touch Save Touch Close Touch Preferred DNS Server Touch the button under Preferred DNS Server 1 enter the DNS Server IP Address using the on screen keypad Touch Save then touch Close Touch Alternate DNS Servers if required Touch the button under Alternate DNS Server enter the Alternate DNS Server IP Address using the on screen keypad Touch Save Note If DHCP is enabled the Alternate DNS server information is not available as a feature summary Touch Close System Administrator Guide 5 3 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enable Dynamic DNS Registration Note If your DNS server does not support dynamic updates then this function does not need to be enabled 38 Touch Dynamic DNS Registration 39 Click on Enable then Save 40 Touch Close three times 41 Press th
161. d and all job submission will be prohibited for the duration of the overwrite The power on off button will be ignored during image overwrite The device should not be in diagnostics mode when the Overwrite is started The device screen indicates a status of Diagnostics Mode this mode is used by a Customer Service Representative when servicing the device The device should not be used to perform any jobs and the power should not be switched off while an Overwrite is being performed At the Device 1 Pressthe Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter 3 If necessary press the Machine Status button then touch the Tools tab System Administrator Guide 8 19 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 4 From Tools touch Security Settings 5 Touch On Demand Overwrite 6 Select either e Standard will exclude Print File directories and Scan to Mailbox jobs Fax Dial directories and Mailbox contents e Full everything from memory and hard disk s will be overwritten 7 Touch Overwrite Now to start the Image Overwrite process 8 The Overwrite confirmation screen will appear The device will be taken offline and will be unable to receive any incoming jobs The Image Overwrite will proceed to overwrite all image data on the hard disk The process will take approximately 20 minutes for Standard overwrite and Appr
162. d by default to request an IP address from a DHCP server If your DHCP server provides a valid IP address you will not need to configure the device with an IP address HTTP is also enabled by default Print a Configuration Report to verify the IP address To print a Configuration Report on demand go to the device 1 Pressthe Machine Status button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close wo po BJ 2 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Device Connection How to Add or Change a Static IP Address when there is no DHCP Server Available At the Device 1 Press the Log In Out gt button 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter the Password 1111 then touch Enter Touch the Machine Status button Touch Tools Touch Network Settings Touch TCP IP Settings Touch Dynamic Addressing Touch Disable to disable DHCP and touch Save 9 Touch IP Address Host Name 10 Touch IP Address and enter a valid IP Address and touch Save 11 Touch Host Name and enter host name and touch Save 12 Touch Close 13 Touch Subnet and Gateway 14 Touch IP Gateway and enter a valid gateway address and touch Save O9 w OY Um Pet 15 Touch Subnet Mask and enter a valid subnet mask address and touch Save 16 Touch Close 17 Touch TCP IP Ena
163. daily overwrite perform the following steps 1 GS p ND At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address or Location field Press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the On Demand Overwrite link Select Scheduled in the directory tree Select the required frequency from the Frequency drop down list to enable the Overwrite System Administrator Guide 8 21 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 9 Specify the time for the Overwrite in Hours Minutes 24 Hour Clock The device will be taken offline each day at the time specified to perform the overwrite If Weekly is selected you can select a day in the week for the schedule event to run on that day of the week at the time you specify If Monthly is selected you can select a day between 1 and 28 for the task to run on that date of the month 8 22 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security PostScript R Passwords The PostScript language has some powerful utilities that could be used to compromise the security of a system These utilities can be password protected so as to prevent abuse This feature is concerned with the ability to set the various passwords In addition we have extended the PostScript language with custom operat
164. ddress information by printing a Configuration Report To print a Configuration Report go to the Device Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages enpe Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close e Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD This was delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device Review any README file contained with the printer drivers To install printer drivers on Windows Vista choose one of the following options e Connect to an existing print queue already created on a network server e Create a new print queue on the Windows Vista workstation Connect to an Existing Print Queue Note You will need to know the server name where the print queue is located and the printer share name At your Workstation click on Start then select Control Panel Open the Printers folder Double click on Add Printer Click A printer that is not attached to my computer network printer Click on Next The Searching for network printer screen will appear Click on Next The Specify a Printer screen appears Click on Browse for a Printer and click on Next Select the server where the print queue is located and click the printer share name Click on OK 0 Click on Yes to connect to the printer 49 90 X Re po Ee 6 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print
165. de file for your device from the www xerox com website or from your Xerox Customer Support Representative The upgrade file will have an extension of dlm dynamically loaded module Download the upgrade file to a local or network drive You will be able to delete the file after the upgrade procedure It is important to obtain the correct upgrade file for your particular model of device System Software Version To determine which model of device you have check the system software version At the Device 1 Pressthe Machine Status button 2 View the Software Version Note TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be enabled on the device so that the device can be accessed via the web browser Procedure 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP Address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Click on the Upgrades in the directory tree Check to enable Upgrades box Click on the Apply button 0 Click on the Manual Upgrade in the directory tree 1 89 0 oY UT bee Inthe Manual Upgrade area click on Browse to locate the software upgrade file dlm obtained earlier 22 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Software Upgrad
166. default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree 99 Ur Pg NM The Authentication Configuration page displays Click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication in the Current Configuration area 9 Inthe Where is the information located area select Xerox Secure Access from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and select Remotely on the Network from the drop down menu for Web User Interface Authentication and Authorization Click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page System Administrator Guide 7 17 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 10 In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure or Edit button for Web User Interface Authentication 11 Follow the instructions to select the required Authentication Type See Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Solaris on page 7 3 See Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 on page 7 4 See Authentication Configuration for NDS Novell on page 7 5 See Authentication Configuration for SMB Windows NT4 and SMB Windows 2000 2003 on page 7 7 See Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS on page 7 8 When you have configured the required Authentication Type click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration
167. display a low warning message about a Supply s level By setting a value to 0 the user will see NO WARNING MESSAGE that the Supply is getting low 1 Click on the Low Supply Warning In the directory tree 2 Select the days remaining from each supply drop down menu 3 Click on the Apply button Support The CentreWare Internet Services Support page provides easy access to the Xerox website The page can also be set up to show Xerox support telephone numbers and the contact details for the System Administrator To Edit Xerox or Administrator Support Contact Details Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Support tab Click on the Edit Settings link Enter the contact details in the entry fields Click on the a Save button to accept the settings If prompted enter the User ID and Password of the Administrator s account and click on Login OT ody qoc b Undo button to revert back to previous details c Cancel button to cancel the changes Other features and Services Other features and service that can be configured and is supported by Internet Services are explained throughout this guide 4 12 System Administrator Guide Network Installation This chapter explains how to set up the device to operate in different network environments e TCP IP Settings on page 5 2 e Windows XP on page 5 16 e Apple Talk on page 5 22 e
168. dmin Logout in the upper right corner and click on the Logout button Note To see individual Mailboxes click the Scan tab of Internet Services To scan to these mailboxes refer to the directions in the Interactive User Guide delivered with your device 12 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Scan to Mailbox Use Scan to Mailbox 1 wn 19 000 4 VER 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 At the device touch the Workflow Scanning icon Touch your mailbox folder template in the Template Destinations List If prompted touch the Enter Password for Folder button Enter your mailbox folder password touch Done and touch OK Touch the Options tab Touch File Format Select the required file format Single Page TIFF PDF and Multi Page TIFF are supported Touch Save Place a document on the device to scan and press the green start button At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Scan tab Select Mailboxes Inthe Scan to Mailboxes menu select your mailbox If prompted enter your mailbox folder password and click OK The scanned image will appear in the Folder Contents list If it does not click the Update View button If you selected to create a PDF or Multi Page TIFF image select the required option from the Action menu To save a copy of the image to your
169. dress Resolution drop down menu Click on the Apply button to implement any changes If required Click the Undo button to cancel any changes made and return to the previous values Configure an SMTP Server on the device 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on Login Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select SMTP Server in the directory tree Under Required Information select either IP Address or Host Name Enter the IP Address or the Host Name of the SMTP Server Enter a valid E mail address in the ColorQube E mail Address box matching the account set up on the SMTP Server which the device will use as a default E mail From and Reply To address Under Optional Information the Maximum Message Size per fragment the acceptable range is 512Kb to 20480 Kb Number of Fragments and the Total Job Size can all be set to control the size of E mail jobs sent to the SMTP Server Select the required setting for the E mail Job Splitting Boundary 13 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 E mail 20 21 22 23 For Login Credentials if the mail account does not need password
170. e 12 Click on the dlm file obtained earlier 13 Click on the Open button 14 Click on the Install Software button to proceed with the upgrade e If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 e Click on the Login button 15 The file will be sent to the printer and will disable the printing functionality The web browser will become inactive and you will not be able to access the device via this method until the upgrade has completed and the device has rebooted The upgrade should take no longer than 30 minutes 16 Once the device has completed the upgrade it will reboot automatically The Configuration Report will print if enabled Check the Configuration Report to verify that the software level has changed Auto Upgrade You can set the device to automatically schedule device software upgrades from a central server at a specific time on a regular basis Note This procedure will delete any current jobs in the device print queue and prevent further jobs from printing until the upgrade has completed If you wish to preserve these jobs allow them to complete before upgrading your software All configured network settings and installed options will be retained by the device after the Software Upgrade process Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Obtain the new software for
171. e Entering the IP address negates the need for name to IP resolution Entering the NetBIOS Name or host name sends the name query request to either the WINS or DNS servers for resolution Make sure the addresses of the WINS or DNS servers have already been set up for use with this device under Connectivity Protocols Microsoft Networking or TCP IP Entering an IP Address or NetBIOS name can also be useful in allowing local network SMB name query broadcasts through a router if so desired 16 Enter details for up to 8 Alternate Domain Controllers Optional and backups if required 17 Click on the Save button to save the settings and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 18 In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration 19 Onthe Service Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 20 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 21 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 22 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unloc
172. e Edit button to edit details of a Host Group If you change a name of the Host Group that is being used in the Security policy then the updated host group name will also reflect in the security policy details 4 Todefine or modify a Host Group enter details in the Name Description fields 5 Inthe Address List area select atleast one set of network information Select either IPvA or IPv6 For Address Type select either Specific Subnet or All from the drop down menu For IP Address enter the IP Address System Administrator Guide 8 13 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 6 Click on the Save button Protocol Groups This option displays all the Protocol Group saved and the details of each Protocol Group 1 Click on the Protocol Groups tab under IPsec heading 2 Protocol Groups can be deleted by highlighting a Protocol Group and clicking on the Delete button if the Protocol Group selected is not being used by a security policy then click on the OK button 3 To add or edit a Protocol Group in the IP Protocol Group area click on the Add New Protocol Group button to add a new Protocol Group or highlight a Protocol Group and click on the Edit button to edit details of a Protocol Group If you change the name of a Protocol Group that is being used in Security policy then the updated protocol group name shall also change in the security policy entry 4 Byclicking the Add New Protocol Grou
173. e Log In Out button touch Logout to exit Tools mode Configure Dynamic Addressing Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure that the following items are available and or the tasks have been performed e Existing operational network utilizing the TCP IP protocol gt DHCP or BOOTP Server should be available on the network e Device must be connected to the network via Ethernet Cable Installation via DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is enabled on the device by default If the device is connected to the network the TCP IP information will be configured when the device is powered on and no further configuration is required Print a Configuration Report to verify that TCP IP information is correct 1 Press the Machine Status button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close Sn ope aos The Confirmation Report is printed verify the TCP IP information Installation via BOOTP or DHCP Ensure your device is connected to the network with Ethernet cabling 1 Go to the device and press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter 3 Press the Machine Status button and then the Tools tab 4 Touch Network Settings 5 Touch TCP IP Settings 6 Touch Dynam
174. e Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Cloning in the directory tree From the display of available check boxes verify that Accounting is among them Qo MI Ov VI 0 UN Click again on the General Setup link then select Configuration in the directory tree and verify that both devices have the same System Software Version To make a Back up file 1 Atyour workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device with the settings that you want to copy in the Address bar and press Enter 19 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Standard Accounting Ur Pow 10 Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Cloning in the directory tree From the display of available groups select the settings that you wish to clone To clone all features click on the Clone button or to customize the configuration file disable any of the features by clicking the checkboxes next to the feature s and then click on the Clone button Right click on the dlm link that appears and select Save Target As A dialog box will prompt you to specify and name and location for the cloned file Ensure the extension reads dlm Click on t
175. e Device Name or IP Address Click on OK 7 Click on the Installable Options button 8 Ensure that LAN Fax shows a status of Installed 9 Click on OK Configure the Printer Driver Manually To configure the printer driver without using bi directional communication return to the Configuration tab within the Properties of the printer driver 1 Click on Installable Options Click on the LAN Fax menu Click on Installed Click on OK Click on OK to close the printer driver Properties wr ow Use the Feature Windows At your Workstation Open a document that you want to fax Click on File then Print Click on your printer If you have a Properties or Preferences click on it Check that you are on the Paper Output tab Click on the Job Type menu rege Click on Fax Follow the steps in Add Fax Recipient below Mac OS Users Open a document to fax and click on File and then Print Click on the Xerox printer Click on Xerox Features from the Copies and Pages menu Ensure you are in the Paper Output area and click on the Job Type menu Click on Fax UN VES c3 Add Fax Recipient 1 Click on Add Fax Recipient Enter the name of the fax recipient in the Name area Enter the fax number of the recipient in the Fax Number area Enter details such as Organization Phone Number E mail Address and Mailbox number if required mom p If you wa
176. e Disable Password Reset 9 Click on the Apply button Note This policy will be followed if the admin password is forgotten If Enabled the password can be reset to the Factory Default using directions available from Xerox Support If Disabled a chargeable service call would be required if the password is forgotten IP Filtering The IP Filtering security feature provides the ability to prevent unauthorized network access based on IP address and or port number filtering rules set by the System Administrator using Internet Services Authorized users will be able to create IP Address filtering rules Authorized users can enter a list of addresses that shall be allowed to access the device and or a list of addresses that are not allowed to access the device 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address or Location field Press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link M 8 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security 6 Select IP Filtering in the directory tree Defining IP Filtering with the Define IP Filter Rule dialog 7 Click on the Add button to display the Add IP Filter Rule page 8 Fromthe Protocol drop down list select the protocol All TCP UDP or ICMP that the rule will apply to
177. e Edit User page edit any relevant field and click on the Edit User button Password Settings Use this page to set or change the password rules This page is only available to users who are System Administrators 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the User Information Database link Select Password Settings in the directory tree 9o Ur Bx UJ NS On the Password Settings page in the Password Rules area enter details in the Minimum Length and Maximum Length field 9 Checkto select either or all options Cannot contain Friendly Name Cannot contain User Name Mustcontain at least 1 number 10 Click on the Save button Admin Password There are two options on this page e New Password this option allows you to change password e Reset Policy this option allows you to either enable or disable Password Reset New Password This page is part of the Authentication Configuration Wizard It is also accessible from the Authentication Configuration page Note The first time that Authentication Configuration is selected the Device System Administrator Password page appears Use this page to change the defa
178. e IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Billing Information in the directory tree 4 Click on the Refresh button to view the current billing information in the Total Impressions area Usage Counters The Billing Meter area shows the date and number of impressions that were notified to the Xerox Communication Server if this has been set up 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Usage Counters link 4 Click on the Refresh button to view the current usage in the Usage Counters area Consumables The Consumables page allows you to view the status of the Customer Replaceable Units CRUs within the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Consumables in the directory tree System Administrator Guide 4 3 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 4 The Consumables screen will show consumable information for gt ColorQube Stick e Cleaning Unit gt Document Feeder Feed Roller The Status will display either one of the following OK e Reorder Supply is getting low e Replace Unit Supply is used up and requires immediate replacement For each unit the Lif
179. e Remaining icon describes the current supply level as a percentage and provides a bar graph visual display Trays The Trays page allows you to view paper supply setup and paper output 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Click on the Trays in the directory tree 4 The Trays page displays the current paper supply Instructions for changing the paper stock are contained in the Interactive User Guide delivered with your device Jobs The Jobs tab displays a list of active and completed jobs You can also delete jobs in this tab Note The details displayed may differ from those shown on the device s touch screen Active Jobs The Active Jobs page displays information about the active job list on the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Jobs tab Active Jobs will display 3 Click on the Refresh button to update the information in the table The following information is shown e Job Name The title of the print job e Owner The person submitting the job e Status The current status of the job e Type Displays whether the job is print scan or fax e Copy Count Displays the number of copies requested for the job 4 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 CentreWare Intern
180. e Scan Confirmation Report print If the Scan Confirmation Report does not print perform the following steps at your workstation 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Su Select General in the directory tree Select On from the Confirmation Sheet drop down menu and click on the Apply button Co OY GUT EN Return to the device and scan another document using the DEFAULT template View the error message as detailed on your confirmation report View the Scan Confirmation Report If the Report reads FAILED Failure transferring job to network server the scan repository location may be incorrect Check the following 1 Openthe web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select File Repository Setup in the directory tree Click on the Edit box and check the details configured for your Scan Filing Repository Co ML 5 Make any a
181. e Xerox website www xerox com Customer Support If you need assistance during or after product installation please visit the Xerox website for online solutions and support http www xerox com 1 2 System Administrator Guide Device Connection This chapter describes how to connect your device to a network and configure Ethernet settings Front View Power On Off Switch System Administrator Guide 2 1 Device Connection ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Rear View Connection Panel Power Cable Inserting the SIM Card Connection Panel Inserting the SIM Card 2 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Device Connection Device Control Panel Overview Job Status Services Services Display and Touch Log In Out Help Interrupt Clear All Home Screen Printing Language Machine Status Numeric DialPause Cancel Start Stop Power Keypad Initial Connection Follow these steps to physically connect your device to the network 1 Connect the Power Cable Ensure the device is connected to a suitable power supply and that the power cord is fully plugged in to the electrical outlet 2 Connect the Ethernet Cable Connect a 10 100 1000 BaseT Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port at the rear of the device and the other end of the cable to your network port 3 Insert the SIM Card Insert the SIM Card before powering On the device the SIM slot is located at the rear of the device 4 Power On the Device
182. e and that it is not grayed out or unavailable For instructions to configure the device on the network refer to Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 You may need to press the Services button view the E mail button on screen Install E mail before proceeding For instructions refer to E mail on page 13 1 Note If you have installed E mail but the button is grayed out or unavailable at the device press the Log In Out button Enter the Administrator s User Name default is 1111 touch Next enter Password default is 1111 touch Enter touch the Tools tab and touch User Interface Settings Touch Service Enablements then E mail set the service to Enable and touch Save Reboot the device with the Power On Off button For instructions on use of the Power On Off button click the Previous Menu button at the top of this page then click the button labeled Power On Off Button Verify that the E mail Settings Have Been Correctly Configured on the Device by printing a Configuration Report System Administrator Guide 24 3 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 At the Device 1 Pressthe Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close eno gc S View the Network Setup details Verify that the SMTP IP Address is correct and that the TCP IP Domain Name Host Name and DNS settings are properly configured W
183. e device screen interface and that this is not grayed out and unavailable You may need to press the Services button to view the Internet Fax button on screen Install Internet Fax before proceeding For instructions refer to Internet Fax on page 14 1 Note If you have installed Internet Fax but the button is grayed out or unavailable at the device press the Log In Out button Enter the Administrator s User Name default is 1111 touch Next enter Password default is 1111 touch Enter touch the Tools tab and touch User Interface Settings Touch Service Enablements then Internet Fax set the service to Enable and touch Save Reboot the device with the Power On Off button For instructions on use of the Power On Off button click the Previous Menu button at the top of this page then click the button labeled Power On Off Button Verify that the Internet Fax settings have been correctly configured on the device by printing a Configuration Report At the Device 1 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close ws View the Network Setup details Verify that the SMTP Server Address is correct and that the TCP IP Domain Name Host Name and DNS settings are properly configured Verify the POP3 Server Address is correct Are the Internet Fax Settings Correctly Configured For instructions refer to
184. e mail address when they log in via Secure Access Click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Device User Interface Authentication Xerox Secure Access Click on the Manually Configure button 7 16 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 16 In the Server Communication area select either IPv4 Address or Hostname 17 Enter details in the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port fields 18 Enter the details in the Path field 19 Under the Device Log In Methods heading select Xerox Secure Access Device Only e g Swipe Cards if you wish to allow the user to enter their swipe card at the UI Select Xerox Secure Access Device alternate on screen authentication method if this option should not be allowed When the second option is enabled a button labelled Alternate Login is displayed on the Instructional Blocking Window providing users with an alternate method to log in For example this feature can be enabled for users who are unable to use their swipe card When the alternate button is selected the remote server presents a series of log in screens on the local user interface The remote server is still responsible for authenticating the user All other Xerox Secure Access options are supported with this setting 20 Under the Accounting Information heading note that this item will
185. e useful This feature enables you to copy a number of configuration settings from one device to another For more information see the Cloning topic in this guide This device offers enhanced security For information refer to the Security and Authentication sections Install Printer Drivers Refer to Print Drivers on page 6 1 of this guide and follow the instructions provided 2 10 System Administrator Guide General Setup Set a Description for the Device The CentreWare Internet Services Properties Description page contains information that identifies a specific device model name and physical location 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Select Description in the directory tree Type a name of your choice for the device in Device Name Type the site location for the device in Location O9 NI COY UT E B3 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values Administrator Tools Password The Administrator password is required to access the administrator tools function both from the device touch screen and CentreWare Internet Services Access to the administrator tools is necessary to configure the device network connectivity
186. ect Settings Select Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs Select Add Remove Windows Components Select Other Network File and Print Services Click Details Check the box to select Print Services for UNIX Click OK Click Next Close the Add Remove Programs window Add the Printer 9000 c 2 w I From the Start menu select Settings then Printers Double click Add Printer and click Next Select Local Printer and deselect Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer Click Next Select Create a new port and choose LPR Port from the Type pull down menu Click Next Enter the IP address of the printer Enter a name for the print queue and click OK You will be prompted for a printer driver Select Have Disk and browse to the location of your printer drivers 10 Select the INF file then click Open System Administrator Guide 6 5 Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The wizard will return you to the previous dialog Verify the path and file name are correct and click OK Select the model that corresponds to your device and click Next The Name your Printer screen appears Enter a printer name Select Yes if you wish to make this the default printer then click Next The Printer Sharing Screen appears If you will be sharing this printer with other clients select the Share As button and e
187. ect the printer and click the Show Info button Click Installable Options Select the options as installed on your device If you want to use the Save Job for Reprint feature ensure Job Storage is set to Installed Click Apply Changes Close the Printer Info box Print a document to verify that the printer is installed correctly View the Printer Utility on the CentreWare Print and Fax Services CD For further information on Configuring the Printer Driver and Installation refer to the CentreWare Print Drivers Guide for Macintosh CD 6 14 System Administrator Guide Authentication Authentication Overview The Authentication service can be enabled to prevent unauthorized use of installed device options A System Administrator can configure the device so that a user cannot access Color Copy Workflow Scanning E mail Internet Fax and Server Fax when these features are installed on the device unless the user has been authenticated There are five authentication options Authentication Off if available Users can access any service without restriction Network Authentication The System Administrator can select one of the following operating systems to provide network authentication Kerberos Solaris Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 NDS Novell SMB Windows 2000 2003 LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol e Local Authentication With Local Authentication enabled the System Administrato
188. ection of this guide before continuing with this procedure Note If Server Fax is enabled Embedded Fax will be disabled and the LAN Fax option will be unavailable in the driver Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure that the device is fully functioning in its existing configuration e The Embedded Fax option must be installed on the device e The ColorQube printer driver must be installed on your Workstation Enable LAN Fax Windows Printer Drivers LAN Fax must be enabled in your printer driver to support the LAN fax feature LAN fax can be enabled automatically with Bi directional communication or manually Both instructions are detailed below Configure the Printer Driver Automatically At your Workstation 1 From the Start menu click on Printers and Faxes Windows XP If you cannot see this option in the Start menu then click on Start followed by Control Panel first Settings then Printers Windows 2000 Settings then Printers and Faxes Windows 2003 2 Right click on your printer driver and click on Properties 3 Click on the Configuration tab 4 Click on Bi Directional Setup System Administrator Guide 16 1 LAN Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 5 Enter the IP Address of your printer if necessary 6 Ensure Bi directional Communication is set to Automatic or click on Manual and enter th
189. ed Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e AnIP Address or Host Name must be configured on the device e DNS must be enabled and configured on the device e HTTP must be enabled so that Internet Services can be accessed e Ensure the system time configured on the device is accurate This is used to set the start time for self signed certificates Creating a Digital Certificate 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select Machine Digital Certificate Management in the directory tree OY gr VES UJ 3 Note SSL cannot be implemented until a digital certificate is installed on the system 7 Click on the Create New Certificate button 8 Select either Self Signed Certificate or Certificate Signing Request radio button Note A self signed certificate is inherently less secure than installing a certificate signed by a trusted third party Certificate Authority CA However specifying a self signed certificate is the easiest way to start using SSL A self signed certificate is also the only option if your company does not have a Server functioning as a Certificate Aut
190. ed it will be accessible to users on the network The administrator can configure the device to use one EAP type EAP types currently supported on the device are e EAP MD5 gt PEAPvO EAP MS CHAPv2 e EAP MS CHAPv2 Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Create a user name and password on your authentication server which will be used to authenticate the Xerox device e Ensure your 802 1X authentication server and authentication switch are available on the network System Administrator Guide 7 13 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enable 802 1X At the Device Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab Touch Network Settings Touch Advanced Settings At the Warning screen touch Continue Touch 802 1X Touch Enable Select the Authentication Method EAP type used on your network by touching the Authentication Method 10 Touch Username Oo 5 N DB B NY c3 11 Enter the user name required by your authentication switch and server 12 Touch Save and Save again 13 Touch Close 14 Touch Password 15 The network controller will now reset taking the device offline for several minutes 16 When
191. ed image based on content and then compress each area in the optimal manner for that image area This option allows for smaller output files with better image quality Note PDF files are exported as version 1 3 unless JBIG2 is enabled in which case they are exported as 1 4 The use of MRC or Flate do not require 1 4 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Internationalization Internationalization allows administrators to specify the locale where the device is situated This is used to determine the type of coding used by the device to interpret data such as print jobs 1 Ge dq d At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Internationalization in the directory tree If you want to specify the locale select the required setting from the Select Locale drop down menu The device will make an assumption on the encoding that are most likely used If you want to enter the specific encoding of user strings provided for the device select Custom from the Select Locale drop down menu and select the required encoding priority order Click on the Apply
192. ed on the device and no further configuration is required by the administrator If the hard disk is removed from the network controller then the encrypted data remains protected because the encryption key is not stored on the network controller hard drive Note Changing the User Data Encryption setting will reboot the Network Controller This may result in a loss of user data and will interrupt or delete current jobs on the device System Administrator Guide 8 1 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 To Disable User Data Encryption 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select User Data Encryption in the directory tree Under User Data Encryption Enablement select Disabled click on the Apply button de Uo m Note Changing the User Data Encryption setting will reboot the Network Controller This may result in a loss of user data and will interrupt or delete current jobs on the device User Information Database The User Information Database allows you to add new users to the database once added they can be deleted from the database and information of the user can also be edited Password Settings allows you to change password rules Note
193. ed on the device so that the device s web browser can be accessed e Enable SNMP Smart eSolutions Client and CentreWare web If you want to use Smart eSolutions Windows Client or CentreWare web Visit www xerox com smartesolutions for further instructions and to download the software System Administrator Guide 3 9 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 SMart eSolutions Information 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Status tab Select SMart eSolutions in the directory tree In the Enrollment section verify that the Enrolled radio button is selected LEE uM Oats The Communication Setup section indicates if your device is successfully communicating to Xerox If there is an error in communication or HTTP Proxy Server is not configured click on the Configure button to update the internet proxy settings 6 Inthe HTTP Proxy Server area check the Enabled checkbox 7 Select either IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button 8 Enterthe IP Address settings or the Host Name and click on the Save button to return to the SMart eSolution Setup page 9 Tochange the Daily Transmission Time click in the time box and change the time to the required time 10 Click on the Apply button Meter Assistant Verify devices are enabled on Xerox com 1 Goto www xerox com 2 Click on Submit Meter Reads 3 Login t
194. eeds a Service Representative to fix it then let them know this code when you talk to them e Description Displays a warning or the problem and how to fix it e Skill Level Displays the suggested skill level needed to fix this problem The levels are Trained System Administrator needed to fix this problem Untrained Normal user can fix this problem Field Service Xerox Support needed to fix this problem 4 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 CentreWare Internet Services Management Network Administrator needed to fix this problem No intervention required A normal device status Rebooting the device It is possible to reboot the device from Internet Services 1 Click on the Status tab 2 Click on the Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 3 Click on the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time Billing Information and Usage Counters The Internet Services Billing Information page displays the total number of impressions copied printed scanned or faxed by the device The Usage Counters page shows you the number of impressions and images sent by the device Billing Information The Billing Information page provides current and previous readings of all device counters 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter th
195. efer to the Training and Information CD2 delivered with your device Deferred Fax Setup This procedure is only necessary if you pressed the Setup Later button when the Fax Setup screens appeared and you now wish to configure Embedded Fax settings using the Fax Setup Screens At the Device 1 Pressthe Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then touch the Tools tab Touch Service Settings 9 2 Touch the Fax Service Settings System Administrator Guide 15 3 Embedded Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 M 9 oO 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Touch the Fax Country Setting Select the required or nearest country location by touching an entry in the Country Selection list Touch Save Touch Line 1 or Line 2 Setup The Line 1 Setup screen appears Selectthe required Dial Type For a tone line select Tone For a 10 pulse per second line select Pulse If in doubt touch Tone Note The Pulse Tone feature is not available in some countries Enter the fax telephone number for the device by touching the Fax Number button and pressing the buttons on the keypad At least two digits must be entered here Note Customers in the Czech Republic are advised to contact their Xerox Service Representative to perform this task Option
196. elect Print a test page to verify the printer is installed 15 Select Make this my default if required 16 Click on Finish 9o TM gx wr NA cx so Configure the Printer Driver If your device has any installable options fitted then these should be set in the driver for example a High Capacity Feeder or a Finisher 1 At your Workstation click on Start then select Control Panel Open the Printers folder 2 Right click the appropriate printer icon and select Properties 3 Click the Configuration tab System Administrator Guide 6 11 Print Co E On 9 10 11 12 Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Click Bi Directional Setup Bi directional communication automatically updates the printer driver with the printer s installed options The driver Printing Preferences will report information about the printer s operational status active jobs completed jobs and paper status If you do not want to configure Bi directional Setup go to step 7 Click Automatic to have the driver automatically configure the IP address of the device or click Manual and enter the IP address or host name of the device If you want to change the default SNMP settings click SNMP Community Name and enter the required information Click on OK Click on the Installable Options If Bi directional setup has not been enabled select the options that are installed on the device Click on OK Click on OK to cl
197. elect the required scanning option for 2 Sided Scanning Select the option that best describes the How Original was Produced of your e mail documents Select the required option for Scan Presets Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Advanced Settings Advanced settings allows you to select options as follows e Image Options allows you to lighten or darken the image to be scanned Image Enhancement prevents reproduction of unwanted shading from the originals Resolution allows you to choose the resolution setting to be applied to the scan Quality File Size allows you to choose the quality setting for the document or image to be scanned and mail 1 Inthe Advanced Settings area click on the Edit button 2 Select the required options in the Advanced Settings area 3 Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page Layout Adjustment Layout Adjustment settings includes e p UNE ux Original Orientation allows you to choose the direction your images are loaded in the Document feeder Original Size allows you to choose either Auto Detect which allows the device to automatically detect the original size of the document or Manual Input Size which requires user to input the size of the document Edge Erase when selected allows scanning the complete page In the Layout Adjustment area click on the Edit button Select the required options
198. em Administrator Guide 15 1 Embedded Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 5 If you have purchased the 2 Line Fax Kit fit the kit following the instructions contained with the kit Once fitted connect the second telephone cable to the second port on the back of device 6 Switch the device on by pressing the Power On button Complete the Fax Setup Screens 1 The Fax Setup or Install screen should appear If it does touch Set up Now If it does not see Deferred Fax Setup later in this document Note If you do not wish to run through the fax configuration touch the Set up Later button Embedded Fax will be unavailable until the fax configuration screens are completed from within the administrator tools screens See Deferred Fax Setup later in this document for instructions Select the required or nearest country location by touching an entry in the Country Setup list Touch Next Touch Line 1 or Line 2 if applicable Ux esc The Line Configuration screen appears Select the required dialing method For a tone line select Tone For a 10 pulse per second line select Pulse If in doubt touch Tone Note The Pulse Tone feature is not available in some countries 6 Enterthe fax telephone number for the device by touching the Fax Phone Number button and pressing the buttons on the keypad At least two digits must be entered here Note Customers in the Czech Republic are advised to contact their Xerox Service Repre
199. ent from the device In the Signature entry box enter text that you want to appear as the default signature in every e mail Select an option from the Confirmation Sheet drop down menu Off This setting will not produce a Confirmation Sheet On This setting will produce a Confirmation Sheet that will provide error information and indication that the job has reached the recipient s on Errors Only This setting will produce a Confirmation Sheet only when error information is indicated Check the Enable box for Auto Send to Self if you wish to add a copy of the sender s e mail to the Address List The Enable E mail Security feature provides enhanced security when sending e mail messages and attachments This feature utilizes the authentication options of the device along with an optional secure e mail server to protect data transmitted as e mail Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page System Administrator Guide 13 3 E mail ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Scan to E mail Scan to E Mail settings will set the defaults for the following E mail Subject Output Color 2 Sided Scanning and Original type 1 2 o 4 Gv Ui P tw Click on the Edit button Enter text in the Subject box to define a default subject that will appear in e mails sent from the device Select the required option for Output Color Select the required content option for Content Type S
200. enter a name that is easy to identify as the Scan to Home template and enter a Friendly Name as mentioned in step 7 This will ensure users can identify the Scan to Home template Templates can be created on the device by the Workflow Scanning Scan to Mailbox and Scan to Home features with the same name 11 In the Determine Home Directory area select either LDAP Query or No LDAP Query to define the method that the device will use to find the user s home directory LDAP Query 12 Select LDAP Query if you want the device to query the LDAP server with the authenticated login name entered by the user to retrieve the user s home directory 13 Verify the LDAP mapping for Home Directory is correct To test it click the LDAP Mapping for Home Directory link 14 Inthe LDAP User Mappings screen in the Server Information area check that the LDAP Server is set correctly for your environment 15 In the LDAP screen click User Mappings Enter a user name valid on your LDAP server in the Enter Name area Click Search and review the LDAP mapping for Home Directory Return to the Scan to Home screen Go to the Subdirectory instructions below No LDAP Query 16 Select No LDAP Query if you want to define a network path to file scanned images The device will append the user s authentication login name to the end of the Network Home Path to create the user s home directory 17 Enter the path to a location on your network where scans
201. entication Server will be necessary for web user interface Authentication if this feature is additionally desired You will need to configure LDAP communications on the device as stated in the LDAP LDAPS topic in the Authentication section of this guide Configure Authentication 1 Qo DOO EG ON 10 11 12 13 14 15 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree The Authentication Configuration page displays in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Xerox Secure Access form the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication Select your required option from the Web User Interface Authentication drop down menu When a user attempts to access Internet Services they are prompted to enter their login information The option selected from the web user interface Authentication menu defines how the device will validate the user s rights to access Internet Services This is required because if the user normally authenticates at the device with a card reader there would be no meth
202. enu Select the Default template and place a document in the document handler View template details on the monitor Press the Start button to scan the document Check the scan folder on your file server to verify the image was filed The Next Step button is to proceed to the Configure the Default Template instructions HTTP HTTPS Before starting the Installation procedure please ensure that the following items are available and or the tasks have been performed e Ensure that HTTP HTTPS services and a web service such as Apache are running on the server where POST requests and scanned data will be sent for processing by a CGI script Note the IP address or host name Note HTTP and HTTPS protocol both require server side scripts to allow files to be transferred to your HTTP server from your device CGI Common Gateway Interface script A program that is run on a web server in response to input from a browser The CGI script is the link between the server and a program running on the system i e a database Download a sample script a Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter b Click the Properties tab C If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select on the File Repository Setup link Click on the
203. ept changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous value 20 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Supporting LPR Printing 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Note TCP IP and HTTP should have been initially configured refer to Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 of this guide and follow the steps provided System Administrator Guide 5 7 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select LPR LPD in the directory tree Check the Enable box to enable LPR LPD Note Disabling LPR LPD will affect clients printing to the device over TCP IP using the LPR printing port co N Ie 9 NS 9 Inthe Port Number enter an LPR LPD port number The default is 515 10 In the Advanced Settings area check the Enabled box to enable PDL Switching PDL switching allows the device to process print jobs which contain two or more printer languages for example PCL and PostScript or ASCII and PostScript 11 Checkthe Enabled box to enable PDL banner page attributes override LPR control file attributes for job name and owner Th
204. er Any user can print from the folder but documents cannot be deleted or modified The Private folder is created by a user only when the device is in Authentication mode The user marks the folder as Private and the folder is only visible to the Owner and the System Administrator 7 When you have selected the appropriate Permissions click on the Apply button The Folder is displayed in the Folders List Modify or Delete Folder You can modify or delete existing folders that contain Saved Jobs using CentreWare Internet Services 1 To modify a folder access CentreWare Internet Services At your workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 The CentreWare Internet Services options for your device are displayed Note To find out the IP address of your device print a Configuration Report Refer to Configuration Page on page 3 2 3 Select the Jobs option 4 Select Saved Jobs tab to access the folder options 5 Select Manage Folders The window displays all the Public folders and any Private folders belonging to you 6 Checkthe box next to the folder you want to modify 7 Select options required for the folder The folder can be deleted by selecting the Delete Folders button The folder and the contents of the folder are deleted from the list on this screen and the list of available folders at the device Saving a Job Prior to using the Reprint
205. er sets to print documents in multiple languages in an SAP printing environment To order the kit contact your Xerox representative The CentreWare Font Management Utility is used to manage fonts on one or more printers The management process involves downloading soft fonts to your printer s For example you may have a logo or graphic that uses a particular font By downloading the font to a printer you can print the logo or graphic with the appropriate typeface and other attributes such as weight and colour Downloading fonts to printers can also improve printing performance and reduce network traffic Downloaded fonts may then be added deleted or exported to a file The utility also allows you to add or delete printers or view printer lists The utility is available at no cost from the Support and Drivers section of www xerox com Unicode Xerox Unicode 3 0 for SAP fonts will enable printing Japanese Korean and Chinese characters from SAP using the following fonts ANMDAJ ttf Andale Mono WT J Japanese version ANMDK ttf Andale Mono WT K Korean version ANMDS ttf Andale Mono WT S Simplified Chinese version ANMDT ttf Andale Mono WT T Traditional Chinese version Unicode uses the Font Management Utility Refer to your Xerox Representative for further information System Administrator Guide 24 11 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 24 12 System Administrator Guide Index Numerics 10 x OS X 5 23 A Actions 8
206. er which all users and groups will be retrieved Distinguished name is a unique name for an entry in your LDAP directory For example cn USERID o xerox c us Note Many UNIX Linux LDAP servers require this attribute to be set and is used frequently when Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server is set to Authenticated User Select one or both of the Enable Custom Filter boxes for the type of filter that you wish to apply For the E mail Address Book filter in the box provided type in the LDAP search string filter that you wish to apply The filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill in order to return the information you seek The form of the typed search string filter is LDAP objects placed inside parenthesis For example to find all users that have an E Mail attribute mail enabled type objectClass user mailz If you are not familiar with LDAP search strings use an Internet browser search to find examples For the User ID Query Filter in the box provided type in the LDAP search string filter that you wish to apply The filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill in order to return the information you seek The form of the typed search string filter is LDAP attributes placed inside parenthesis For example to find the user with a SAMAccountName of Bob type objectClass user sAMAccountName Bob If you are not familiar with LDAP search strings use an Internet
207. ername admin for any local or network accounts on the device Configuration Page The Configuration page allows you to view device setup details for example Network Setup and Workflow Scanning Setup Note These details can also be printed by clicking on the Print Configuration Page button 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Status tab Select Configuration Report in the directory tree To view information about a setting select the required configuration setting from the list ga og Mw To print the Configuration details click on the Print Configuration Page button How to Print a Configuration Report The Configuration Report details the device software versions and network settings configured for the device The Configuration Report automatically prints when the device is rebooted or powered on You can print a Configuration Report by following the instructions below At the Device 1 Pressthe Machine Status button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close gore ot How to Disable the Configuration Report from Printing at Power On At the Device 1 Pressthe Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter
208. ervice is not present in the list this indicates that the software install was not completed or failed Click on the Apply button At the Device 1 2 9 2 Press the Services button Touch the EIP Application button that you registered Your XEIP workflow is accessible from the new button System Administrator Guide Workflow Scanning Workflow Scanning allows a user to scan an original document convert it to an electronic file and distribute and archive that file in a variety of ways The final destination of the electronic file depends on the template chosen by the user at the device s user interface The template may reside on the device or may be cached on the device from a pool of templates pulled from a remote server The scanned file will be stored on a pre determined network server and then with the help of server or desktop software e routed to a user s PC desktop for viewing or editing e integrated with a variety of popular document management and workflow applications e sent to a network directory or filing location for later retrieval sentto an e mail distribution list FreeFlow SMARTsend has replaced CentreWare Workflow Scanning Services Note FreeFlow SMARTsend combines and enhances the powerful features of two Xerox products FlowPort and CentreWare Workflow Scanning Services to deliver one integrated software application FreeFlow SMARTsend scanning services Built on the Microsoft NET pla
209. ess you must reference the new address within your web browser to locate the device 10 Enter a unique Host Name for your device 11 Select the desired method for obtaining a Dynamic IP address from the IP Address Resolution drop down list or select Static to give the device a static IP address 12 If you select Static type the IP addresses that apply in Machine IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address Note If BOOTP or DHCP address resolution mode is selected you cannot change the IP address Subnet Mask or default gateway If RARP address resolution mode is selected you cannot change the IP address Select Static if you wish to disable dynamic addressing Domain Name 13 Enter a valid Domain Name DNS Configuration 14 Enter an IP address for the Preferred DNS Server Enter an IP address for Alternate DNS Servers 1 and Alternate DNS Servers 2 15 Check the Enable box to enable Dynamic DNS Registration DDNS System Administrator Guide 5 5 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 16 17 18 Note If your DNS Server does not support dynamic updates there is no need to enable DDNS Check the Enable box for Release Registration in the DHCP DDNS area ONLY if you wish to release this device s IP address upon reboot Default is unchecked Check the Enable box for Self Assigned Address in the Zero Configuration Networking area to support communicating with other devices u
210. est button When done click on the Apply Select the Feature Access tab then in the Color Copying Access Group box enter the name of a group defined at the LDAP server that you want to provide with Color Copying access to the device To verify the groups enter a name of one of the members of the LDAP server group in the Enter User Name box then click on the Test button When done click on the Apply button Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Local Authentication With Local Authentication enabled the System Administrator defines passwords via a web browser or locally at the device for users to use to authenticate to the system and use restricted services 1 co iM Gy oum Ges Ut ONS 10 11 12 13 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Locally on the Device Internal Data
211. et Services Saved Jobs Within the Jobs tab screen select the Saved Jobs tab The screen will display the Saved Jobs the memory used on the device you can also create new saved job folders and manage saved job folders Print Print ready documents can be quickly and easily submitted for printing using the Job Submission page A print ready document is a file that has been formatted and saved for printing from the source application or the Print to File check box was selected in the printer driver The following file formats can be printed from the Job Submission page e PCLO 5e e PCL XL e PostScriptG Level 2 and 3 e TIFF e ASCII Text e PDF e JPEG Note ASCII text files from systems other than PCs may not print correctly if hard carriage returns ASCII Control M are not used as line delimiters in the text Large print jobs need adequate space on your hard drive when printing through Internet Services 1 At your Workstation open the web browser from your Workstation Enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar Click on Enter 2 Click on the Print tab 3 Inthe File Name area at the bottom of the screen enter the name of the document that you want to print or click the Browse to locate the document on your workstation 4 Inthe Printing area enter the number of Copies required between 1 9999 5 Select the required Job Type e Normal Print e Secure Print you will need to enter
212. et Services logo and model of the device The header for the ColorQube series also includes a user mode icon and the name or type of a logged in user Just below this panel on most pages is the tab bar which corresponds to the five functions or page buttons These are Status Jobs Print Scan Properties and Support You can navigate through the pages when you click the text on each tab e Menu Panel Displays a navigation tree listing the items available within each category with the currently displayed item highlighted e Main Panel Displays information and settings for an item selected on the Menu Panel When you open Internet Services a welcome screen is displayed If you click the Configure Device button a Configuration Overview screen opens which provides links to the printing protocols and services that you can configure on the device If you click the I have a Cloning File button you can copy settings from one device and transfer them to another device with the same version of system software System Administrator Guide 2 7 Device Connection ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Setup HTTP The Internet Services HTTP screen enables the System Administrator to specify the Keep Alive Timeout Maximum Connections Port Number and Secure HTTP SSL settings 1 At your Workstation open the web browser enter the IP Address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If pr
213. et after every scan job select On from the drop down menu New distribution templates created for the device can be set to automatically update by entering a time in the Refresh Start Time area Login Source settings control user access to a pool of templates stored on a remote server Communications to the server including entry of the required device Login Name and Password are set up by selecting Advanced then Template Pool Setup in the Internet Services directory tree Select Authenticated User to have the Authentication Server control remote template pool access Select Prompt at User Interface to have a standalone server prompt device users for access This works well for small offices without an Authentication server Select Prompt if Authenticated User Does Not Match Template Owner to prompt authenticated users accessing templates containing either no or other users owner names Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job Click on the Save button to accept changes made System Administrator Guide 10 7 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 At the Device 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Touch the Workflow Scanning button on the touch screen Touch the Workflow Scanning tab Touch the Show button Select All Templates from the All Templates drop down m
214. evices 18 2 Enabling AppleTalk 5 22 Energy Saver 3 10 Entry Data 8 8 Ethernet Cable 2 5 Ethernet Configuration 2 5 Event Description 8 7 Event ID 8 6 Extensible Interface Platform 9 1 Extensible Service Setup 3 9 4 10 Extensible Services Setup 9 1 F File Transfer Protocol 10 2 ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Flate Compression 3 6 Font Management Utility and Unicode 24 11 FTP 10 2 FTP File Transfer Protocol 10 2 G General Setup 3 1 4 7 GUI Method on HP UX Client Version 10 x 5 31 GUI Method on SCO UNIX Environment 5 34 GUI Method on Solaris 2 x 5 33 H Host Groups 8 13 HP UX Client Version 10 x 5 31 HTTP Setup 2 8 HTTP HTTPS 10 2 10 8 I Identify PC or User 8 7 IIO Status 8 7 Image Overwrite Perform an Image Overwrite over the Network 8 20 Image Settings 4 8 JBIG2 3 6 Image Settings 3 5 Immediate Image Overwrite 8 17 Initial Connection 2 3 Insert the SIM Card 2 3 Install Printer Drivers 2 10 Installation Wizard 2 4 Installation Wizards 2 3 Internal Address Book LDAP 13 5 Internationalization 3 8 4 9 Internet Fax 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 Authentication and Authorization 14 1 Configure an SMTP Address 14 3 Configure General Settings 14 4 Configure POP3 Settings 14 3 Enable Internet Fax 14 2 Internet Fax Addressing 14 1 Using Mixed Size Originals 14 1 IP Address How to verify 2 8 IP Filtering 8 4 IP Sec 8 12 IPv4 5 5
215. fault is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree Oo Wi Gv UL 1 9 NS The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication 9 Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Remotely on the Network from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization Ensure that the Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP checkbox under Personalization is checked and click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page 10 In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Authentication Server 7 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 11 In the Authentication Server page select Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 from the Authentication Type drop down menu 12 In the Default Domain Controller Required area enter details in the Domain field 13 Select either IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button 14 If IPv4 or IPv6 Address is selected enter the IP Address and Port and Backup IP Address and Port details of the default Default Domain Controller 15 If Host Name is selected enter the Host Name and Port and Backup Host Name and Port details of the Default Domain Controller Not
216. fer Protocol Available to file to a mail server Configure a Fax Repository using FTP Information Checklist 23 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Server Fax Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed Ensure that File Transfer Protocol FTP services is running on the server or workstation where images to be faxed by the device will be stored Note the IP address or host name Create a user account and password for the device When the Server Fax feature is used the device logs in using the account transfers the file to the server or workstation and logs out Note the user account and password details Create a directory within the FTP root to be used as a fax repository Note the directory path Test the FTP connection by logging in to the fax repository from a PC with the user account and password Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights and the FTP service setup Enter the Fax Repository Details via Internet Services 1 TS 72 49 99 M Qv Ule uos F3 12 13 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button
217. fields Touch the Save button to retain the settings Touch the Save button Touch the Log In Out button and touch Logout to log out To verify Accounting is enabled press the Services button on the front panel The Touch Panel should display a screen with two buttons One is the User ID button and the other is the Account ID button This indicates the system has enabled accounting successfully Go to the Network Accounting Server to Activate the Device Open the Network Accounting application and configure it so that the IP Address or fully qualified domain name of device is entered as the destination for retrieval of data Refer to the manufacturer s documentation with your Network Accounting server to complete this task 20 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Accounting Enable Network Accounting in your Windows Print Driver Windows 2000 1 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes 2 Right click on the device printer icon 3 Select Properties 4 Select Configuration 5 Select Accounting 6 Select Xerox Network Accounting from the Accounting System drop down menu 7 Select Prompt for Every Job if you want users to enter their User and Account ID each time they print 8 You may also select the Mask User ID and Mask Account ID checkboxes to have the asterisk character echoed when this information is entered 9 Otherwise select Use Default A
218. figure the device to display a notice on the user interface screen when the scan disk memory is low The scan disk memory decreases according to the number of pages scanned with the Workflow Scanning Internet Fax E mail or Server Fax features when these features are installed on the device When the scan disk memory is low scan jobs may slow down or the device may cancel the job When a user attempts to scan more pages than the Scan Job Memory Notification setting the device will display a message to show how many pages can be scanned before the device will slow down or be forced to cancel the job The default is 30 scanned pages 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Alert Notification link Click on the Local UI Alerts In the directory tree Select the option you want to configure for the number of scanned pages If you want to specify a number between 1 75 scanned pages select Custom and enter the number of pages in the box 9 Click on the Apply button OO SN OY ES oJ NJ System Administrator Guide 4 11 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Low Supply Warning This feature allows you to set the device to
219. figured via CentreWare Internet Services 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Alert Notification link OY SES BJ E mail Alerts a Click on the E mail Alerts in the directory tree In the Recipient Group Addresses area check the required Group Click the field under E mail Addresses and enter e mail address or addresses Continue to add e mail addresses to create your Alert Notification group as required 0 6 In the Reply to E mail Address box enter the address of the administrator or user who is designated to receive any reply e mails that are sent by users who are listed in the Alert Notification group Note This is normally set to the System Administrator s e mail address f Click on Apply to save the changes 4 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 CentreWare Internet Services g If prompted enter the User ID and Password of the Administrator s account and click on Login h TheSettings Confirmed Send Test e mail window will appear Click OK if you wish to send a test e mail to the Alert Notification recipient s or Cancel to return to the Alert Notification page i Ifyouwant
220. filing location repository on your server The fax server retrieves the documents from the filing location and transmits them via the telephone network The fax server manages the fax transfer and has the ability to send confirmation reports which are printed at the device Server Fax and Embedded Fax The Embedded Fax and Server Fax services are mutually exclusive and only one of them can be enabled at any time If Server Fax is currently enabled and Embedded Fax is then enabled Server Fax will be disabled automatically If Embedded Fax is currently enabled and Server Fax is then enabled Embedded Fax will be disabled automatically Server Fax Authentication and Authorization Authentication Service Access Control can be enabled on the device to prevent unauthorized access to the network options If Authentication is enabled a user will be prompted to enter a user name and password or a PIN before they can access the Fax feature For a full description of the Authentication feature refer to the Authentication section in this guide Authentication can be configured after Server Fax has been installed Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to enabling Server Fax e Install the Scanning Hardware Kit Refer to the instructions contained with the kit to complete this task Conta
221. fy that the recipient received the scanned document in his her e mail inbox You have completed the steps to create a public address book 13 10 System Administrator Guide Internet Fax Internet Fax allows you to send documents to one or more Internet Fax destinations and receive an Internet Fax at the device without requiring a telephone connection The Internet Fax service provides confirmation of delivery in much the same way as for the standard Fax service by returning the Delivery Status Notifications DSN s and Message Disposition Notifications MDN s for the job via the Internet Using Mixed Size Originals It is recommended that the originals used with the Internet Fax feature are of the same size If mixed sized originals are to be used ensure that the Mixed Sized Originals option is selected when performing an Internet Fax at the device Once the Internet Fax feature has been configured select the Internet Fax tab at the device followed by Image Adjustment and then Original Input Mixed Sized Originals can be selected as an option Internet Fax Addressing Recipient addresses can be added by entering the SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol address for example name company com at the Internet Fax screen In addition both an internal and a public address book can be configured for the device and accessed from the Internet Fax screen Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP provides access to the internal or corpora
222. g The device exports the signed certificate to the client to establish an SSL HTTPS connection There are two options available to obtain a server certificate for the device e Have the device create a Self Signed Certificate e Create a request to have a Certificate Authority sign a certificate that can be uploaded to the device A self signed certificate means that the device signs its own certificate as trusted and creates the public key for the certificate to be used in SSL encryption System Administrator Guide 8 9 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 A certificate from a Certificate Authority or a server functioning as a Certificate Authority for example Windows 2000 running Certificate Services can be uploaded to the device Note A separate request is required for each Xerox device With SSL enabled from the Connectivity Protocols HTTP selections of the Properties tab of Internet Services and a digital certificate installed remote users accessing the system over an HTTP based interface are assured of having their network communications protected against eavesdropping and tampering using strong encryption The only action required by the workstation user is to type https followed by the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the system into the Address or URL box of the web browser The subsequent acceptance of a Digital Certificate completes the exchange of the Public Key enabling the encryption process to proce
223. g the Print Driver or CentreWare Internet Services Print Submission Jobs are placed into a folder located on the device and can be accessed and retrieved for printing at later date Jobs can be recalled and printed as many times as you need Using the Print Driver settings or CentreWare Internet Services the job type can be set to Save Job For Reprint When this job type is selected an option is provided to Save Only or Save and Print Many of the job settings are stored with the job and they can be modified at the time of printing All Saved Jobs are stored as encrypted files if encryption of user data is enabled Encryption ensures that third parties cannot read print scan and e mail these files You can enable disable encryption of user data refer to User Data Encryption on page 8 1 Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensurethe device is fully functioning on the network e To backup jobs and folders an FTP server must be available on the network recommended Create an account with rights to the FTP root which the device can use to access the FTP server Enable Reprint Saved Jobs 1 Atyour workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 C
224. ge based on content and then compress each area in the optimal manner for that image area This option allows for smaller output files with better image quality Note Regarding Searchable PDF and PDF A If this option is available by enabling the selection you will provide Workflow Scanning E mail and Internet Fax users with the ability to choose Searchable as an option for their PDF and PDF A file formats The Searchable Format provides a second layer of data with the text of the scanned document The second layer is converted to an optical character readable format enabling the text of the document to be searched on copied and pasted as desired JBIG2 JBIG is a standard algorithm for lossless compression of bi level images two color images specializing in the preservation of thin lines JBIG2 compression is usually used for text and halftone documents and is claimed to be able to compress scanned documents up to 10 times smaller than with TIFF 64 A further claim is that it allows scanned manuals books check images and other document types to be viewed and manipulated efficiently over the Internet This method yields a very small black and white file size with fast viewing performance This compression format requires Acrobat 5 with PDF version 1 4 or greater Flate Compression Select Enabled or Disabled Flate is a lossless compression algorithm based on two other algorithms Huffman compression and LZ77 the first LZW Huffm
225. gs to their previous values 10 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 3 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Billing Information and Usage Counters The Billing and Counters page provides the Billing information for the device including number of impressions printed or copied 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Status tab 3 Select Billing Information in the directory tree to view Current Billing information and click on the Refresh button to refresh Billing information 4 Select Usage Counters in the directory tree to view the counts from the Usage Counters click on the Refresh button to refresh the Usage Counters Banner Sheet When documents are sent to print at the device a banner sheet is printed identifying the PC that sent the print job It is possible to disable this setting both within the printer driver and from the device administrator tools These instructions describe how to disable the banner sheet from the device At the device Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab Touch Service Settings Touch Job Sheets Touch
226. h sufficient lease time so that the normal maintenance and service down times of the fax server does not result in a change in IP address Enable Server Fax Server Fax is an optional feature for the device When you purchase the Internet Server Fax Kit you will receive the information and hardware required to install this feature The Kit contains the Subscriber Installation Module SIM and self explanatory instructions used to install the Server Fax option In addition before installing the Server Fax feature make sure that the Workflow Scanning E mail Kit was installed Print a Configuration Report to verify that Server Fax is an Installed Option 1 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close wr Configure a Server Fax Filing Location Repository Once configured the device will transfer images that a user has specified to be faxed to a directory known as the fax repository on the fax server The fax server monitors the fax repository for documents to be faxed Select your required transfer method from the list below e FTP File Transfer Protocol Requires an FTP server running on a server or a workstation e SMB Server Message Block Available for filing to an environment that supports the SMB protocol e HTTP HTTPS Supports scans to a web server using a CGI script e SMTP Simple Mail Trans
227. he Protocols link Select TCP IP in the directory tree Verify that the printing device has been configured with a static IP address preferred Subnet Mask Gateway Address and Host Name Verify that the Domain Name for your network has been supplied and that DNS is enabled and configured to resolve Host Names to IP Addresses Note Changing the device IP Address will impact other protocols NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP Printing These protocols will need to reference the new IP Address Disabling TCP IP will impact other protocols NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP Printing This web user interface will be disabled until TCP IP is reenabled from the local user interface If any of the above items are incorrectly set reset them and click on the Apply button Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Select LPR LPD in the directory tree and verify that the Protocol is Enabled and the Port Number is set to 515 Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time A Configuration Report should have printed by default when the device rebooted Look at
228. he Save button The dlm file can now be used to restore the information to the same device or to clone other devices To Restore Settings or Clone Settings to Another Device 0700 0 OY Ut I BUND 10 Note This procedure will cause the device to reboot and will be unavailable over the network for several minutes Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the device that you wish to restore or clone the settings to Press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Cloning in the directory tree In the Install Clone File area click on the Browse button Locate the dlm clone file Click on the Install button The device will be unavailable over the network for several minutes Once rebooted a Configuration Report will print if enabled The XSA settings and data will be restored as they were when the back up file was created If you are cloning another device you may want to change delete or reset the XSA accounts as appropriate for the new device System Administrator Guide 19 7 Xerox Standard Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 19 8 System Administrator Guide Network Accounting Network Accounting provides the ability to manage usage of the device with detailed cost analysis capabilities Print Scan Fax and Copy jobs are tracked a
229. he User Roles tab 10 In the System Administrator Access Access Group box enter the name of a group defined at the LDAP server that you want to provide with System Administrator access to the device Q0 AL OY UI SECO yo 11 In the Accounting Administrator Access Access Group box enter the name of a group defined at the LDAP server that you want to provide with accounting administrator access to the device 12 To verify either group enter a name of one of the members of the LDAP server group in the User Name box then click on the Test button 13 When done click on the Apply button 14 Select the Device Access tab 15 In the Services Pathway Access Group box enter the name of a group defined at the LDAP server that you want to provide with Service access to the device 16 Repeat the process for Job Status Pathway and Machine Status Pathway 17 To verify any of these groups enter a name of one of the members of the LDAP server groups in the Enter User Name box then click on the Test button 18 When done click on the Apply button System Administrator Guide 7 11 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Select the Service Access tab then enter the names of LDAP groups as required in the Access Group box to allow access to individual device services Verify each group by entering a group user in the Enter User Name box and click on the T
230. he required Frame Type from the drop down list 10 Type a polling rate for the print server in Queue Poll Interval 1 240 seconds The default is 5 11 Enter the Print Server Name The default name is XRX_MAC address 12 Enter the print server password in the New Print Server Password box then re enter it in the Retype New Print Server Password box Place a check in the Select to save new password box Service Advertising Protocol SAP 13 Check the Enabled box if you wish to enable SAP protocol 14 Enter the SAP Frequency from 15 300 seconds or enter 0 for none The default is 60 Bindery Settings 15 If using NetWare in Bindery mode enter the names of up to four primary File Servers for the device in the Bindery Settings box NetWare Directory Services NDS 1 Ifusing NetWare NDS NetWare Directory Services enter a directory tree and context for the device in NDS Tree and NDS Context in the Netware Directory Services NDS box 5 26 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation Note That you can also select the IP Address or Host Name radio buttons to specify the server used in the IP environment 2 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values 3 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you re
231. hen this information will override the Default Title and Prompt text entered within Internet Services 23 Click Save 24 Click the Configure button next to Web User Interface Authentication 25 Verify the information configured for the web user interface authentication If you have selected Remotely on the Network enter the address of the authentication server that will validate user accounts 26 Click Save or Close Authorization Configuration 27 If you selected Locally on the Device for the method of Authorization click View next to Local User Information Database Verify the information is correct If you selected Remotely on the Network for the method of Authorization click Configure next to LDAP Server and verify the information is correctly configured At the LDAP screen click Authorization Access and enter the group names from your LDAP server that you want to grant access to For more information refer to LDAP Configuration in this guide 28 Click Save or Close Personalization 29 If you selected Automatically retrieve user s e mail address click Configure next to LDAP Server and verify the information is correctly configured Note If you have already checked the LDAP server information this step is optional 30 Click Save button to save the settings and return to the Authentication Configuration page Device Default State Configuration Set Authentication to control access to indiv
232. hority Windows 2000 running Certificate Services for example or does not wish to use a third party CA 9 Click on the Continue button 10 If you selected Self Signed Certificate fill out the form with your 2 Letter Country Code State Province Name Locality Name Organization Name Organization Unit Common Name E mail Address and Days of Validity 11 Click on the Apply button to continue Values from the form will be used to establish a self signed certificate and you will be returned to the main page 8 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 If you selected Certificate Signing Request fill out the form with your 2 Letter Country Code State Province Name Locality Name Organization Name Organization Unit and E mail Address Click on the Apply button to continue Values from the form will be used to generate a Certificate Signing Request When the process is complete you will be prompted to save the Certificate Signing Request Right click on the link and select Save Target As Save the Certificate to your hard drive and send it to a Trusted Certificate Authority When a signed certificate is received back from the Trusted Certificate Authority upload the certificate to the device To do this return to the Machine Digital Certificate Management screen in the Machine Digital Certificate area click on the Upload Signed Cert
233. ic Addressing By default DHCP is selected 7 Selectthe required Dynamic Addressing method e BOOTP e DHCP 8 Touch Save 9 Touch Close 5 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 10 Press the Log In Out button touch Logout to exit Tools mode IPv4 Configure TCP IP Settings using Internet Services 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Note TCP IP and HTTP should have been initially configured refer to Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 of this guide Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select IP Internet Protocol in the directory tree Ensure that IPv4 is selected The Protocol will be Enabled to enable the TCP IP protocol Qo oo 0 UL D Note If you do not check the Protocol Enabled checkbox you will not be able to access Internet Services TCP IP must then be enabled from the device s user interface 0 CAUTION Disabling TCP IP or changing the IP Address will affect NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP printing If TCP IP is disabled Internet Services will not be available until TCP IP is enabled from the control panel of the device If you change the IP addr
234. ication 7 17 Local Authentication 7 12 Xerox Secure Access 7 15 Network Installation 5 1 O On Demand Overwrite 8 19 Online Offline 3 14 Optimized for Fast Web Viewing 3 7 Overview Control Panel 2 3 P Password Settings 8 3 PDF amp PDF A Settings 3 6 Port 9100 5 13 5 18 PostScript R Passwords 8 23 Power Cable 2 3 Power On 2 3 Print 4 5 Print Driver Configuration 6 3 Print Drivers 6 1 Apple Macintosh 6 13 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional 6 4 Microsoft Windows XP 6 7 Windows Add Printer Wizard 6 2 Xerox Printer Installer 6 2 6 10 Print Protocols 3 3 Printer Driver Windows 2000 2003 Server 6 2 Procedures for AS400 Raw TCP IP Printing to Port 9100 5 28 Properties 4 6 Protocol Groups 8 14 Public Address Book 13 8 Public Address Book LDAP 13 5 R Raw TCP IP Printing Configuration on Windows 2000 5 8 Repository File Transfer Protocol FTP 10 2 Reprint Saved Jobs 16 1 17 1 Enable 17 1 Manage Folders 17 2 Saving a Job 17 3 Restore Saved Jobs 3 14 1 3 5 Save Job for Reprint 3 13 Saved Jobs 4 5 Scan to Home 9 1 10 1 11 1 Configure Scan to Home 11 2 Scan to Mailbox 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 Configure 12 2 enable 12 1 Overview 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 Use 12 3 SCO UNIX Environment 5 33 Searchable PDF 3 6 Searchable PDF A 3 6 Searchable XPS 3 7 Security 7 1 8 1 Security Xerox 8 1 Server Fax 21 1 22 1 23 1 Authenticati
235. ick on the Apply button to implement any changes Configure General Internet Fax Settings 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Click on the Services link Click on the Internet Fax link Select Defaults in the directory tree Also in the General section enter the time required for the Delivery Confirmation Timeout 0 72 hours In the Message Body box enter a default message that will appear on received internet faxes Check the required boxes to select the information fields that will be automatically displayed in the body of the internet fax message In the Signature box enter any additional information you would like included on any fax sent from the device From the Confirmation Sheet drop down menu select the required setting for printing a confirmation sheet In the Filing Options section click on the Edit button Make desired changes to the Document Format and Acknowledgement Report Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page In the Internet Fax Image Settings section click on the Edit button then enter a subject that will appear in all outgoing internet fax messages and click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Default page In the Advanced Settings and Layout Adjustment sections click on the Edit button set desired parameters and Click on the Apply button to implement changes and return to the Def
236. ick on the Save button to save the settings and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 18 In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration 19 Onthe Service Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 20 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 21 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 22 Inthe Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu 23 Click on the Apply button 24 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 25 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Windows 2000 2003 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The de
237. ics Mode this mode is used by a Customer Service Representative when servicing the device The device should not be used to perform any jobs and the power should not be switched off while an Overwrite is being performed Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network e Ensure TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 so that the web user interface Internet Services can be accessed Ensurethat no one is currently using the device 8 20 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security At your Workstation Corl Ov Wr Poo 10 Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the On Demand Overwrite link Click Manual in the directory tree Click on the Start button for either Standard or Full image overwrite e Standard Image Overwrite will delete all image data from memory and hard disk except Jobs and folders stored in the Reprint Saved Jobs feature Jobs stored in the Scan to Mailbox feature if installed Fax Dial Directories If fax card is installed
238. idual Services 31 In the Device Default State Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration 32 Onthe Service Registration screen check the checkbox to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 33 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration page Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 34 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 35 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either e Standard Access Only Lock Tools e Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features e Custom Access 21 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Secure Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu 36 Click on the Apply button 37 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 38 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and Click on the Logout button Use Secure Access At the Device 1 Touch press an area of the device that you have locked 2 Readthe user interface prompt to determine what you need to do to be authenticated at the device Authentication methods include Swipe a card Place a proximity card near to the reader Entera user ID or PIN num
239. ies in the directory tree 9v Qn op NJ Request a Machine Root Certificate The device has the ability to sign its own Certificate Signing Request CSR by using a Device Generic Certificate Authority 1 Right click on the Download the Generic Xerox Device CA link which appears at the bottom of the screen under the Installed Certificates box 2 Select Save Target As 3 Browseto the location where you want to save the cacert pem file and click on Save 4 Thecacert pem file is now ready to be uploaded to any device needing a Machine Root Certificate Install a Root Certificate To complete this procedure you must have a digital certificate available For instructions to configure a digital certificate refer to Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 1 Atthe Trusted Certificate Authorities screen click on the Add button 2 Click on the Browse button to locate the signed certificate from the Trusted Certificate Authority click on the Open button 3 Click on the Upload Certificate Authority button 4 The digital certificate will appear in the list of Installed Certificates 8 16 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security Immediate Image Overwrite Overview The Immediate Image Overwrite feature provides security conscious customers with the ability to overwrite the device s hard disk to protect classified or private information The device s hard disk stores data similar
240. ificate button Click on the Browse button to locate the signed certificate from the Trusted Certificate Authority and click on the Open button Click on the Upload Certificate button If successful the Current Status in the Machine Digital Certificate area will show A Self Signed Certificate is established on this device Note For the upload to be successful the signed certificate must match the CSR created by the device and must be in a format that the device supports To view installed certificates click the Trusted Certificate Authorities in the directory tree for Security The installed certificate will appear in the list Enable Secure HTTP SSL Once the device has a device server certificate you can enable secure HTTP Dd Le In the Properties menu click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select HTTP In the Configuration area under Secure HTTP SSL select Enabled Enter the Secure HTTP Port Number if required Click on the Apply button Close your web browser and then access Internet Services screen again The Security warning will display Self signed certificates usually cause browsers to display messages which question the trust of the certificate Click the OK button to continue System Administrator Guide 8 11 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 IP Sec IP Sec IP Security comprises of the IP Authentication Header and IP Encapsulating Security Payload
241. igure HTTPS before editing SNMP v3 Properties Configuring this feature requires secure web page communication Turning off the SNMP protocols will cause an interruption in the communication between the device and remote client applications Enter a name up to 256 characters for the GET Community Name The default is public Enter a name up to 256 characters for the SET Community Name The default is private ES CAUTION If you change the GET and or SET Community Names you must change all network applications that are communicating via SNMP with this device to use the new GET SET names 12 13 14 15 Enter a name up to 256 characters for the default TRAP Community Name The default is SNMP trap The Default TRAP community name is used to specify the default community name for all traps generated by this device Click Save to apply the changes or Undo to return to the previous settings In the Authentication Failure Generic Traps area check the Enabled box if you want the machine to generate a trap for every SNMP request that is received by the machine which contains an invalid community name Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo return to the previous settings 3 16 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Software Upgrade via Network Connection V WARNING This procedure will delete any current jobs in the device print queue and prevent further jobs fro
242. ime they print oN gv wu You may also select the Mask User ID and Mask Account ID checkboxes to show asterisks when ID s are entered bir 9 Select the Save Accounting Codes to save selection 10 Otherwise select Use Default Accounting Codes and enter the default user ID and the default Account Type 11 Enter the default Account ID 12 Click OK 13 Click OK to exit When you use the printer driver to print a document you will be asked to enter your user ID Enable XSA in your Apple Macintosh Print Driver Mac OS X Open a document to print and select File and then Print From the Print Options Menu select Printer Features Select the Feature Sets menu Select JCL Select Accounting to enable it 9v gr x Print the document Back up XSA Data and Settings and Clone to Another Xerox Device The Cloning feature enables you to copy settings including XSA settings and account information to a file on your workstation or Server You can then use this file to restore the data and settings on the same device or to clone other devices You can only clone XSA settings to another Xerox device that supports the XSA feature Check that the device you want to clone settings to supports XSA 1 Atanetworked workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device that you want to clone to in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter th
243. ined with the fax server software to complete this task 2 Sendatest fax from the device 3 View the location on the server where the fax filing repository was created Verify that a directory with the extension XSM has been created and contains the correct TIFF files one per page of the fax sent Does the fax filing repository contain the TIFF files If the fax filing repository contains the TIFF files then the device has successfully completed its task The problem lies with the third party fax server Ensure the server is configured properly and the path to the fax filing repository is set Refer to the manufacturer s instructions contained with the fax server software to complete this task Check the User Account and Fax Filing Location 1 Verify that the user account and password created for the Server Fax feature are correct and have sufficient rights permissions to write files and create directories in the directory the fax filing location 2 Trylogging into the fax filing location from another PC using the device s account and password Try to create a directory and delete the directory If you cannot perform this function check the user account permissions If the fault requires further investigation refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support Troubleshooting Embedded Fax If you are experiencing problems with Embedded Fax first verify that the device is functioning in its existing configuration b
244. information on using the System Administrator Manager SAM 1 Opena command window on the desktop From the command prompt enter the information below Remember that UNIX commands are case sensitive 2 Type su to become super user 3 Type sh to run the Bourne shell 4 Type lpshut to stop the print service 5 Create the print queue by typing on the same command line lpadmin pqueuename v dev null mrmodel ocmrcmodel osmrsmodel ob3 orc ormhostname orplp Where queuename is the name of the queue being created and hostname is the machine hostname from the etc hosts file 6 Type lpsched to start the print service 7 Type enable queuename to enable the queue to print to the machine 8 Type accept queuename to the queue accepting jobs from the HP UX workstation 9 Type exit to exit the Bourne shell and then exit to exit super user mode 10 Test the queue created Type the command lp d queuename etc hosts 11 Verify that the job is printed at the device Solaris 2 x Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure that the correct IP Address is being used for the machine To verify this print a Configuration Report from the machine At the Device a Press the Machine Status button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Repor
245. inistrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation CUPS The Common UNIX Printing System CUPS was created by Easy Software Products in 1998 as a modern replacement for the Berkeley Line Printer Daemon LPD and A T and T Line Printer LP system designed in the 19705 for printing text to line printers Currently available for downloading from a number of sources on the Internet such as www cups org CUPS is offered in both source code and binary distributions Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 so that the web user interface Internet Services can be accessed e Ensure that the DNS settings are configured Enable Port 9100 as additional support for HTTP IPP printing 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the machine in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 If two additional ports are a
246. ins all internet services from this device will be lost including the web user interface The installation progress can be monitored from the device s interface Image Settings The Image Settings screen allows you to set preferences for compression The options selected in the Image Settings screen impact the transmission time and size of documents that are created when the E mail features are used at the device Settings also impact the job processing time of images scanned with the Workflow Scanning feature 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Image Settings in the directory tree Select the required option for TIFF Color Compression The default is TIFF 6 0 old JPEG 4 5 Note Some applications cannot read the default TIFF output If this functionality is required click on LZW LZW is a lossless general purpose compression used for color and grayscale TIFF images LZW creates a larger file size than the other two options that use JPEG compression 4 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 CentreWare Internet Services 10 11 12 13 For PDF amp PDF A Settings check the enable box for Optimized for F
247. ion page displays the following information e Report Profile e Common User Data e Machine Profile e Machine Hardware e General Setup e Software Versions e Connectivity Physical Connections e Connectivity Protocols e Services e Accounting e Security e Media Trays 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link gv du EM ip Click on the Configuration Report link from the directory tree You can also print a configuration report from this page 1 To print a configuration report press the Print Configuration Report button Cloning This feature provided by Xerox Standard Accounting saves the settings of selected features in a configuration file which can then be used to clone the settings onto other devices To install configuration files to other devices the devices must have the same version of software as this device The Clone feature will create a dlm file script that can be used to configure other devices All devices must have the same version of software for the dlm file to be accepted The software version is located on the Properties tab under General Setup Configuration Report To create a clone file 1 Atyour Workstation open
248. ion provided by Microsoft Then return to the next step in this document Add the Printer 1 From the Start menu select Settings 2 Select Printers 6 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print Drivers e Double click Add Printer and click Next Verify that Network Printer is selected and click Next The Locate Your Printer screen will appear Select the Type the Printer Name option or click Next to browse for a printer Enter the path to the printer or click Next to browse for the print queue created on your server Select the printer and click Next Select Yes if you wish to make it the default printer Click Next Click Finish The printer driver will download to the Windows 2000 Professional workstation Once the printer driver has installed open an application on the workstation and print a test page to verify operation Create a New Print Queue Go to the Windows 2000 Professional Workstation 1 2 3 4 At the Desktop right click the My Network Places icon Select Properties Right click on the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties Verify that the Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol has been loaded If this software is not present install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft Then return to the next step in this document Verify that Print Services for UNIX is loaded z 49 9o x gvour p wg c 0 From the Start menu sel
249. is feature allows you to replace the standard information displayed on a banner page and substitute the user name and job name taken from the print job 12 Select the required option from the Place temporary hold on which jobs drop down menu This feature allows you to set the device to hold certain jobs before printing until the complete job is received This delay helps to ensure that the banner page information prints correctly Some banner sheet information is contained in the job s control file which may not always be the first part of a print job the device receives The following options are available Only those with data file received 1st The device holds the job if the job s data file is received first This ensures the device waits to receive the job s control file information so that the banner sheet contains accurate information All consistent with older implementations This option puts all jobs on hold All data is received before a job begins to print This setting can cause jobs to print slowly but will result in accurate banner sheet information None Use printer s default banner sheet job name if data file 1st The device will not wait to receive the job control information This selection may cause banner sheet information to print incorrectly 13 Click on the Apply button to accept changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous value 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window th
250. it and subtract them from the user s new allocation when it is updated by the administrator If the user s limit is reached before a print job is completed an error report will print at the device to notify the user that their limit has been reached The job will be deleted from the print queue The job may run over due to sheets committed to the paper path The System Administrator has unlimited access to the device User limits can be reset on the Internet Services Report and Reset screen Using XSA at the device When you enable XSA users must enter a valid user name at the device to access the features System Administrator Guide 19 3 Xerox Standard Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 At the Device 1 Press the Services button 2 The User ID screen will show Type the user ID of one of the users that you created in the Manage Accounting area of Internet Services Use the keyboard on the screen to enter the user ID 3 Touch the Enter button 4 The Validation in Progress screen will show 5 If the user is a member of more than one Group Account or General Account they will be asked to select the account that they wish to log in to 6 When the user is logged in the Services screen will show The user can now select the feature that they want to use Create a General Account The XSA feature allows administrators to create both Group and General Accounts Users must be a member of at least one Group Account
251. k on the Apply button to accept the changes or on the Cancel button to exit the window without saving changes Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device Audit Log Audit Log is a log that tracks access and attempted access to the server With TCP IP and HTTP based processes running on the server exposure to access attacks eavesdropping file tampering service disruption and identity password theft is significantly increased The Audit Log regularly reviewed by the System Administrator often with the aid of third party analyzing tools helps to assess attempted server security breaches identify actual breaches and prevent future breaches Access to the log s data is protected by enabling SSL Secure Sockets Layer protocols The audit log and its associated data protected by strong SSL encryption helps to meet the Controlled Access Protection Class C2 criteria set by the United States Department of Defense To enable this feature perform the following steps IMPORTANT Audit Log cannot be enabled until SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled on the device To enable SSL on a device the device needs to have a Server Certificate For instructions to set up a Server Certificate see Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the
252. k on the Save button You have finished configuring the protocol information click on the Close button To print to the device install the printer drivers on your workstation If you need more information refer to Print Drivers on page 6 1 Configure Services If you have installed one or more optional service on your device you can configure the service from Internet Services If you need more specific information about services and how to configure them refer to the following chapters for each service e Workflow Scanning on page 10 1 e E mail on page 13 1 e Internet Fax on page 14 1 e Server Fax on page 23 1 e Embedded Fax on page 15 1 e LAN Fax on page 16 1 e Network Accounting on page 20 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button System Administrator Guide 3 3 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 5 Select Configuration Overview in the directory tree 6 Click on the Settings button next to the service that you want to configure for example E mail Note If you cannot see any services then they have not been installed on your device 7 Clickthe Configure button next to each step and enter the information to configure your service Click on the Save button when you have
253. ked and click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Authentication Server In the Authentication Server page select Kerberos Solaris from the Authentication Type drop down menu In the Default Key Distribution Center Required area enter details in the Realm field Select either IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button If IPv4 or IPv6 Address is selected enter the IP Address and Port and Backup IP Address and Port details of the default Default Key Distribution Centre Required If Host Name is selected enter the Host Name and Port and Backup Host Name and Port details of the Default Key Distribution Centre Required System Administrator Guide 7 3 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Note Entering the IP address negates the need for name to IP resolution Entering the NetBIOS Name or host name sends the name query request to either the WINS or DNS servers for resolution Make sure the addresses of the WINS or DNS servers have already been set up for use with this device under Connectivity Protocols Microsoft Networking or TCP IP Entering an IP Address or NetBIOS name can also be useful in allowing local network SMB name query broadcasts through a router if so desired 16 Enter details for up to 8 Alternate Key Distribution Centres Optional and backups if required 17 Cl
254. ked or Locked from the drop down menu 23 Click on the Apply button 24 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 25 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Authentication Configuration for NDS Novell Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the NetWare protocol is enabled on your device by printing a Configuration Report At the Device System Administrator Guide 7 5 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages 8 0 Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close The Configuration Report will print Verify the NetWare settings configured under Network Setup NetWare should read Enabled For instructions on how to enable NetWare refer to NetWare on page 5 26 of this guide 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Security link 6 Click on the Access Rights link
255. l and what action to be taken 11 For each individual option select settings from each drop down menu 12 Click on the Add Policy button Saved Policies 13 In the Saved Policies area there will be a list of all the policies saved 14 To delete a policy highlight the policy and click the Delete button 15 Also you can make individual policy to be prioritized by clicking the Promote and Demote buttons Disable IP Sec at the device At the device press the Log In Out gt button to access the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter the Password 1111 touch Enter If necessary press the Machine Status button then touch the Tools tab In Tools menu touch Security Settings Touch Image Overwrite Security Touch IP Sec Touch the Disable IP Sec button then touch Close Press the Log In Out gt button to exit Tools pathway MS Touch Logout Host Groups This option displays all the Host Group saved and the details of each Host Group 1 Click on the Host Groups tab under IPsec heading 2 Host Groups can be deleted by highlighting a Host Group and clicking on the Delete button if the Host Group selected is not being used by a security policy then click on the OK button 3 Toaddor edit a Host Group in the IP Host Group area click on the Add New Host Group button to add a new Host Group or highlight a Host Group and click on th
256. layer of security 12 Select the Authorization method in the Authorization drop down menu The card reader and Authentication Solution authenticates validates the user The Authorization method determines which areas of the device a user is allowed to access There are two options Select Locally on the Device if you want the device to check the Local User Information Database for levels of authorization Select Remotely on the Network if you want to use networked databases such as LDAP server to determine levels of authorization Personalisation 13 Click Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP if required 14 Click on Next Configure Xerox Secure Access on the Device Before you complete these steps ensure that the Xerox Secure Access authentication server has been configured to point to the device 15 Atthe Authentication Configuration screen in the Authentication area click the Configure button next to Device User Interface Authentication Xerox Secure Access 16 If the Authentication Solution has been configured correctly the address information should be populated with the address of the Authentication Solution server If the information is incomplete or incorrect click on the Manually Configure button 17 In the Server Communication area select either IPv4 Address or Hostname and enter the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port details 18 Enter the details in the Path box
257. lick on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Reprint Saved Jobs link Select Enablement In the Enablement area select Enabled to enable Reprint Saved Jobs Click on the Apply button oO 4 2 w System Administrator Guide 17 1 Reprint Saved Jobs ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Note All Saved Jobs are stored as encrypted files if encryption of user data is enabled Encryption ensures that third parties cannot read print scan and e mail these files You can enable disable encryption of user data on the User Data Encryption page refer to User Data Encryption on page 8 1 Enable Reprint Saved Jobs in your Printer Driver Windows Operating Systems 1 Oo 4 Ov UT pe wy At your Workstation open the Printers Folder For Windows 2000 2003 From the Start menu select Settings then Printers For Windows XP From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes For Windows Vista From the Start menu select Control Panel then select Printers and Faxes Right click on the Xerox ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Printer Driver Select Properties Click on the Configuration tab Click on the Installable Options button Ensure Installed is selected from the Job Storage drop down menu Click on the OK button to close the Installable Options screen Click on the OK button to close the Properties screen Mac Operating Systems BN At your
258. ll use as the default From address e Test the e mail account by sending an e mail from an SMTP mail client on a networked workstation Use the new account name and password if any to access the account and verify that e mail was received System Administrator Guide 13 1 E mail ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enable E mail Print a Configuration Report to verify that e mail is enabled 1 Ux e oec Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close Verify or Configure your TCP IP Domain Name if necessary 1 Qo i TO MIC GPS o Gg oa At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select IP Internet Protocol in the directory tree Verify or re configure the Domain for this device in the Domain Name box e g abc xyz company com Note that it is preferable for the mail server to reside in the same domain as that of the device Note If Dynamic Addressing has been set on the device DHCP DHCP AutoNet BootP or RARP the Domain Name will not be accessible If you need to change it select Static from the IP Ad
259. ls at the device user interface and change settings via Internet Services For security reasons if you have not changed your password you must change your current System Administrator s password 1 Click on the Admin Password from the directory tree 2 Inthe New Admin Password area enter a password in the New Password box and retype password in the Retype Password box A WARNING Do not forget this password or you could be completely locked out of the system requiring a service call 3 Click on the Apply button to return to the Authentication Configuration Wizard page 1 of 3 The following is an example steps of the Authentication Configuration Wizard e Step 1 of 3 Authentication Configuration Wizard 7 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication This screen explains the concepts of Authentication Authorization and Personalization e Authentication Determines that the person who logs in has given the proper credentials and is known to the system e Authorization Determines what an authenticated user can do for example the authenticated user has permission to use the Copy Service Personalization Adds personal settings for the authenticated user optimizing productivity for example automatically enter my email address to the From field Step 2 of 3 Authentication Configuration Wizard This page allows you to select the Authentication Authorization and the Personalization me
260. ly to the way a hard drive functions on a personal computer but with the data encrypted for extra protection When Print Copy E mail Internet Fax and Scan jobs are submitted to the device information is stored on the device s hard disk if these features are installed and configured on the device Immediate Image Overwrite automatically erases image data on a job by job basis once completed at the device Immediate Image Overwrite and Internet Fax Jobs Note Internet Fax jobs are not overwritten until the job s Delivery Status Notifications DSN s and Message Disposition Notifications MDN s have been received or timeout occurs i e the job is not overwritten until after the Delivery Confirmed state or Sent state is exited This means that the job may not be overwritten for up to 72 hours as this is the maximum timeout setting for an Internet Fax job Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items is available or has been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning in its existing configuration prior to installation Verify that Immediate Image Overwrite is an Installed Option Print a Configuration Report as follows 1 Pressthe Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close war Immediate Image Overwrite Status When Immediate Image Overwrite is
261. m printing until the upgrade has completed If you wish to preserve these jobs allow them to complete before upgrading your software All configured network settings and installed options will be retained by the device after the Software Upgrade process Prepare for the Upgrade Obtain the new software upgrade file for your device from the www xerox com website or from your Xerox Customer Support Representative Download the upgrade file to a local or network drive You will be able to delete the file after the upgrade procedure It is important to obtain the correct upgrade file for your device Determine the software version you are currently running as follows 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the General Setup link 6 Select Configuration Report in the directory tree scroll down to the Common User Data section to see your System Software Version Upgrades The Software Upgrade feature allows the customers to upgrade the device software as requested by a Xerox Customer Support Center Representative without needing a Customer Service Representative to be present To enable or disable software upgrades on the device follow the procedure below 1 At your Workstation
262. m the Network Accounting server when the user is authenticated Note Secure Access cannot be enabled at the same time as Foreign Device Interface Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensurethat the device is fully functional on the network TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be configured so that Internet Services can be accessed e Ensure that the Xerox Partner authentication solution Secure Access Server Controller and Card Reader is installed and communicating with the device Follow the installation instructions from the manufacturer of the authentication solution to correctly set the devices up Make sure to securely mount any external user authenticating devices to the device Ensure that SSL Secure Sockets Layer is configured on the device The Xerox Partner authentication solution communicates with the device via HTTPS e Optional Ensure that Network Accounting is configured if you want the device to send user account information to a Network Accounting server For instructions refer to the Network Accounting section of this guide e You may also need another Authentication Server running LDAP in an ADS environment for example to communicate with the Secure Access Server providing that server with user credentialing information System Administrator Guide 7 15 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 A second Auth
263. me radio button Enter the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the HTTP or HTTPS server For HTTPS communications click View Trusted SSL Certificates to verify that the device has a digital certificate installed Optionally you can check the Validate Repository SSL Certificate box Type in the path starting at root to the CGI script Click Get Example Scripts for working scripts Type in the path to the location of the scan folder in Document Path For web server directories type in the path starting at root Select a radio button for Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine user access to the web server Select Prompt at User System Administrator Guide 10 9 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Interface to have the web server determine user access Select System to have the system directly log in to the web server Select None for rare instances where a login is not required Supply a Login Name and Password if the system will be directly accessing the web server Click on the Save button to accept the changes To configure General Settings select General in the directory tree To print a Confirmation Sheet after every scan job select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the status of the job and the file location if the scan was successful
264. mendments as necessary and try scanning your documents again Scanning via FTP Check that your FTP service is configured properly 1 Open a command prompt window and on one line type FTP then enter a space then IP Address of your FTP Server Press Return 2 Atthe User prompt enter the user name for the account you created for the device scanner 3 Atthe Password prompt enter the password for the account you created for the device scanner 4 This user account should be able to log in If you cannot log in as this user check that your FTP server setups have Read Write access enabled Ensure the password is correct If the user can log in try copying a file into the scan directory to check write access using get and put commands Ensure that the FTP server has the Read and Write boxes checked Ensure that the user account has full access rights to the scanning directory repository Type Exit to close the command prompt window Scanning via NCP NetWare Core Protocol From another workstation log in to the network with the scan user account and password created for the scanning function Browse to the scan filing location and attempt to create and delete a folder If you cannot perform this function check the user account rights 24 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Troubleshooting Scanning via SMB Server Message Block Test the configuration of the scan filing location by attempting to
265. ment 7 Checkthe Enable Scan to Mailbox box 8 Checkthe On Scan tab view Mailboxes by default box 9 Click on the Apply button Note All Saved Jobs are stored as encrypted files if encryption of user data is enabled Encryption ensures that third parties cannot read print scan and e mail these files You can enable disable encryption of user data on the User Data Encryption page see User Data Encryption on page 8 1 System Administrator Guide 12 1 Scan to Mailbox ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Configure Scan to Mailbox 1 Click on Capacity in the directory tree to view the amount of hard drive space being consumed by files in Mailboxes Capacity The total amount of space available on the device for scanned images Used The space currently used to hold scanned images Available The space left for scanned images Percentage Used The amount of space taken by scanned images as a percentage of the total space Click on Files in the directory tree to perform either an immediate or scheduled cleanup of folder files The Files screen allows administrators to delete files stored in Scan to Mailbox folders a If you want to delete files now select the required option in the Immediate Clear Up of All Folder Files area and click on the Delete Files button b To schedule files to be deleted regularly select the required option in the Schedule Clean Up of Folder Files area C Click on the Apply
266. menu 4 Enter details in the Key Lifetime field 5 Select the preferred option from the Perfect Forward Secrecy drop down menu default is None and check the boxes for Hash and Encryption Note Encryption will not display if IPsec Security is set to AH 6 Click on the Save button System Administrator Guide 8 15 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Trusted Certificate Authorities The Trusted Certificate Authorities screen allows you to upload signed digital certificates via the device s web server The certificate contains the public key and digital signature of a Trusted Certificate Authority to support encryption via HTTPS SSL Digital certificates and the enablement of SSL provides encryption for all workflows where the device is used as a HTTPS server Workflows include e Administration of the device via Internet Services e Printing via Internet Services e Printing via IPP e Scan Template Management e Workflow Scanning via HTTPS e Administration of Network Accounting The device exports the signed certificate to the client to establish an SSL HTTPS connection 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select Trusted Certificate Authorit
267. mmunications to the server including entry of the required device Login Name and Password are set up by selecting Advanced then Template Pool Setup in the Internet Services directory tree Select Authenticated User to have the Authentication Server control remote template pool access Select Prompt at User Interface to have a stand alone server prompt device users for access This works well for small offices without an Authentication server Select Prompt if Authenticated User Does Not Match Template Owner to prompt authenticated users accessing templates containing either no or other users owner names 22 Check the User Name and Domain boxes if you want these to appear on the Job Log The Job Log works with the Document Management Fields feature and is filed with the scan job 23 Click on the Save button to accept changes made At the Device Touch the All Services button Touch Workflow Scanning on the touch screen Touch the Workflow Scanning tab Select All Templates from the All Templates drop down menu Select the Default Template and place a document in the document handler View template details on the monitor Press the Start button to scan the document 99 JL gx c Check the scan repository on your server to verify the image was filed The Next Step is to proceed to the General Settings see Optional Step Configure General Settings on page 10 10 Server Message Block SM
268. munity names for the device You can also configure SNMP trap destinations for TCP IP and NetWare IPX that will receive traps from any device on the network SNMP Community Name properties that can be configured are e GET Returns the password for SNMP GET requests to the device Applications obtaining information from the device via SNMP such as Xerox PrinterMap or CentreWare use this password e SET Returns the password for SNMP SET requests to the device Applications that set information on the device via SNMP such as Xerox PrinterMap or CentreWare use this password e TRAP Returns the password for SNMP TRAPS from the device This is the default password for SNMP TRAPS sent from the device via SNMP System Administrator Guide 3 15 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Configure SNMP Community Names 1 Ov Ur E UJ UN 10 11 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity button Click on the Protocols link Select SNMP in the directory tree Check the Enable SNMP v1 v2c Protocol or Enable SNMP v3 Protocol box to enable the protocol To edit SNMP properties click either Edit SNMP v1 v2c Properties or Edit SNMP v3 Properties Note Conf
269. n 9o MOON ur Be wr so 11 12 13 14 15 16 Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Select Manual Upgrade in the directory tree In the Manual Upgrade area click on the Browse button to browse to where the InstallCustomServices dlm is located Select the file click on the Open button then click on the Install Software button If you have not already done so create a digital certificate on your device by referring to Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 Set the days of validity to 9999 Ensure that Secure HTTP SSL is enabled on your device Click Properties Connectivity Protocols and finally HTTP Click on the Enable radio button to enable Secure HTTP SSL Click on the Apply button Note that the screen will disappear temporarily and you will need to refresh your browser To enable Extensible Service Registration from the HTTP web page select Web Services from the selection box near the top of the page Note that the two available selections are HTTP and Web Services Check the Extensible Service Registration checkbox Note that if the Extensible Service Registration web s
270. n the settings to their previous values Alert Notification In the Alert Notification section you can set up groups to notify by e mail when problems occur on the device Alert notification is configured via Internet Services To Set up an Alert Notification Group 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Alert Notification link Select E mail Alerts in the directory tree Check the Enable Group 1 box in the Recipient Group Addresses area Click the filed under E mail Addresses and enter an e mail address or addresses oL Go UN 0 Enter an e mail address in the Reply To E mail Address box 1 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values The Settings confirmed Send a test e mail window will appear Click on the OK button if you wish to send a test e mail to the Alert Notification recipient s or Cancel to return to the Alert Notification page To Assign Notification Alerts to a Group 12 Scroll down to the Recipient Group Preferences area Select the Status Codes that you wish the group s to be notified of by checking the appropriate boxe
271. nal 18 Select Yes to print a test page Click Next 19 Click Finish The printer driver will install At the device and verify that the test page printed Configure the Print Driver 1 From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes The Vista path is Start Control Panel VPrinter s 2 Right click on the printer icon and select Properties 3 Usethe available tabs to set the printing defaults Additional settings may be accessed by clicking the Printing Preferences button on the General tab You have completed the installation of the printer driver on Windows XP For further information on Configuring the Printer Driver and Installation refer to the CentreWare Print Drivers Guide for Windows CD System Administrator Guide 6 9 Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Windows Vista Xerox Printer Installer This section provides instructions on how to install printer drivers manually However you can use Xerox Printer Installer to discover the printer and install drivers To use the Xerox Printer Installer locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM delivered with your device and follow the instructions contained in the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Microsoft Windows Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Verify the device is configured with the correct IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway A
272. nd Port of the LDAP Server 9 Select the server type from the LDAP Server drop down menu 99 ML Sy pau c 10 Enter any further information as required in the Optional Information area Search Directory Root allows you to limit the LDAP search by entering the location on the server where the LDAP information is stored Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server Select the None radio button if no login is required If you select Authenticated User the device will use the login details entered by the user to access the LDAP server This option requires Authentication to be configured on the device If System is selected the device will specify the LDAP server login details and enter the required 13 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 E mail information in the Login Name and Password boxes Format for the login name may be login name or domain login name Enter a Login Name and Password if required for the device to access the LDAP server Format for the login name may be login name or domain login name SSL If SSL is required check the Enable box Note SSL requires a server certificate to be available to the device If you want the device to verify that the server certificate is trusted valid and has a fully qualified domain name FQDN check the Validate Repository SSL Certificate box Click on the View Trusted SSL Certificates link to view secure certificates that
273. nd mail traffic e Check for restricted host addresses at the SMTP server Verify that the device is not a restricted host e Trysending an e mail from the device again Ask the SMTP administrator to confirm that no errors were encountered and check for bounce messages to the device s Reply To address e Check that the message size does not exceed the attachment or message size limit policy of your SMTP server e Troubleshoot the network path to the SMTP server It may be necessary to perform a network trace analysis If the fault requires further investigation refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support 24 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Internet Fax If you are experiencing problems with sending an Internet Fax first verify that the device is connected on the network and functioning as a printer by performing the following activities e Check the network cable at the back of the device e Sendatest page from your PC to the device e If connected via TCP IP try a PING from your workstation to the device Configure your device on the network or resolve any networking issues before attempting to use the Internet Fax feature For Instruction to configure the device on the network see Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 Ensure Internet Fax is installed properly on the device At the device verify that you have an Internet Fax button on th
274. nd write permissions b Makea note of this directory s path Test the connection a Logintothe device s directory on the web server b SendaPOST request and file to the web server C Check to see if the file was received at the repository The script can be defined with script name extension or by path script name extension At your Workstation 99 p cgy enc Ge ga a 10 11 12 13 14 15 Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select File Repository Setup in the directory tree Select Add in the Default File Destination box or Edit if the default File Destination has previously been configured Note During device configuration SMARTsend if used overwrites the Default Repository and Template Pool scan settings If certain applications will use Default Repository settings not matching SMARTsend settings reconfigure the applications to use an Alternate Repository before configuring the device with SMARTsend s Add Update feature Enter a name to describe the filing destination template in the Friendly Name box Select HTTP or HTTPS from the Protocol drop down menu Select either the IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Na
275. nfiguration Protocol Settings The device performs auto address DHCP configuration every time it powers up This is used for neighbour discovery and address resolution on the local IPv6 subnet However you can choose to use manual configuration automatic configuration or a combination of automatic and manual configuration a Select one of the following options e Use DHCP as directed by a router this option is fully automatic The DHCPv6 Address will be obtained and displayed on the screen e Always Enable DHCP this option is fully automatic The DHCPv6 Address will be obtained and displayed on the screen e Never use DHCP when this option is selected you must configure the Manual Address Options and DNS separately DNS Configuration 14 Enter an IP address for the Preferred DNS Server Enter an IP address for Alternate DNS Server1 and Alternate DNS Server2 15 Check to enable Prefer IPv6 Address over IPv4 Note If your DNS Server does not support dynamic updates there is no need to enable DDNS Manual Address Options The device can be configured with up to 4 manual IPv6 addresses 16 Check the Enable box for Manual Address if required 17 The Router Prefix is derived from router advertisements Select a router address prefix from the list supplied in the Router Prefix menu to populate the prefix for manual entry address 18 Click on the Add button to add your address 19 Click on the Apply button to acc
276. ng e Scan to EMail e LDAP e Internet Fax Security Policies To enable IP Sec Note IP Sec cannot be enabled until SSL Secure Sockets Layer is enabled on the device To enable SSL on a device the device needs to have a Server Certificate For instructions to set up a Server Certificate see Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select IP Sec in the directory tree Ensure Security Policies tab is highlighted under the IPsec heading In the Settings area place a check in the Enabled box to enable the IP Sec Click on the Apply button 2 7 0 40 Define Policy 8 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security An IPsec Policy is a set of conditions configuration options and security settings which enable two systems to agree on how to secure traffic between them Multiple policies can be simultaneously active however the scope and policy list order may alter the overall policy behavior 10 In the Define Policy area there are three policy options Hosts Protocols Action This area allows you to select setting for allowing or discarding Hosts and Protoco
277. nit 484 32768 with 1400 as the default This allows you to set the maximum packet size for SLP 27 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values 28 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device 29 Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 30 Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time Configure Raw TCP IP Printing Note TCP IP must be enabled before Raw TCP IP Printing is enabled Raw TCP IP is a printing method used to open a TCP socket level connection over Port 9100 to stream a print ready file to the printer s input buffer and then to close the connection after sensing an End Of Job indicator in the Page Description Language or after expiration of a preset timeout value Port 9100 printing does not require a Line Printer Request LPR from the workstation or the use of a Line Printer Daemon LPD running on the printer Raw TCP IP printing is selected in Windows 2000 as the Standard TCP IP port 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab
278. nk 14 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Internet Fax Select IP Internet Protocol in the directory tree Enter the domain name in the Domain Name box e g abc xyz company com Note If Dynamic Addressing has been set on the device DHCP DHCP AutoNet BootP or RARP the Domain Name will not be accessible If you need to change it select Static from the IP Address Resolution menu list and click on the Apply button Click on the Apply button to implement any changes Note It is only necessary to configure the DNS settings if Host Names are to be used Configure an SMTP Address 1 O9 MEL Ov Uv w 10 11 12 13 14 15 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select SMTP Server in the directory tree Under Required Information select either IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name Enter the IP Address or the Host Name of the SMTP Server Enter a valid E mail address in the ColorQube E mail Address box matching the account you set up for this device on the SMTP Server Under Optional Information the Maximum Message Size per fragment the acceptable range is
279. nstall the Clone File on Another Device Note This procedure will cause the device to reboot and will be unavailable over the network for several minutes Click on the Status tab Select Welcome in the directory tree Click on the I Have A Cloning File button If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Scroll down to the Install Clone File area click on the Browse button to locate your file Click on the Open button then click on the Install button gv Ur peo qnc The device will be unavailable over the network for several minutes Once rebooted a Configuration Report will print if enabled Image Settings The Image Settings screen allows you to set preferences for the various file formats that the device is capable of creating when features such as E mail and Internet Fax are used at the device Accessing Image Settings including Linearized PDF and XPS 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Image Settings in the directory tree Select and configure the Image Settings for the various file formats as desired 99 2 Deo t9 When done
280. nt Selected Report then touch Close For instructions to both install and enable the Network Accounting feature refer to Network Accounting on page 20 1 Note that Network Accounting can be installed but not enabled Finally try rebooting the device with the Power On Off button For instructions on use of the Power On Off button click the Previous Menu button at the top of this page then click the button labelled Power On Off Button Test Communication between the Network Accounting Server and the Device At your network accounting server 1 Openthe web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the address bar and press Enter 2 Thedevice s Internet Services web pages should appear It they do not verify the IP address settings on the device If you do not have a web browser test connectivity by pinging the IP address of the device from your Network Accounting server 3 Verify that your network accounting server is configured properly Consult the manufacturer s documentation with your network accounting server to perform this task Dynamic IP Addressing and Network Accounting If Dynamic TCP IP addressing is used be sure to set lease times long enough on the DHCP server to allow for normal maintenance shutdowns If your device suddenly stops communicating with the network accounting solution print a Configuration Report to check TCP IP settings to be sure that they have not changed Also verify by pinging that the se
281. nt to add this recipient to your personal phonebook click on Add to Personal Phonebook 16 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 LAN Fax 6 7 Click on OK The recipient will show in the Recipients list Add Recipient from Phonebook 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 If you have a Personal Phonebook created you can add a recipient name from it Click on Add from Phonebook Otherwise go to step 17 In the Add from Phonebook menu if you have more than one phonebook available select the required phonebook from the Personal Phonebook menu Click on the recipient that you want to fax to To view the details for the recipient double click on the recipient If you want to add more than one recipient hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and click on each name When you have finished selecting your recipients click on the green arrow The names appear in the Fax Recipients list Click on OK If you want to save this list of names as a group click on the Save As Group Enter a name for your group in the Group Name box Click on OK Setting up a Cover Sheet 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Click on the Cover Sheet tab If you want to add a cover sheet to your document click on Print a Cover Sheet from the Cover Sheet Options menu Enter the information that you want to show on the cover sheet in the Cover Sheet Options box
282. nter a share name Click Next Enter a location and comment optional Select Yes to print a test page and verify that it prints at the device Click Next Click Finish You have completed the installation of the printer driver on Windows 2000 Professional Configure the Print Driver UA Bv cn From the Start menu select Control Panel and then Printers Right click on the printer icon and select Properties Click on the Configuration tab Change the settings you wish to set for the printer Click OK For further information on Configuring the Printer Driver and Installation refer to the CentreWare Print Drivers Guide for Windows CD 6 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print Drivers Windows XP Note You can use CentreWare to configure the Print Driver in this environment Xerox Printer Installer This section provides instructions on how to install printer drivers manually However you can use Xerox Printer Installer to discover the printer and install drivers To use the Xerox Printer Installer locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM delivered with your device and follow the instructions contained in the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers Guide for Microsoft Windows Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Verify the device is configured with the correct IP Add
283. o Xerox com and ensure all devices are enabled for automation If devices are not enabled submit for enablement on Xerox com Check back on Xerox com after 24 hours Supplies Assistant Eligible devices will automatically be enabled for Supplies Assistant once the device is registered with Xerox When you call to order supplies let the representative know the on hand balance and that you would like to use Supplies Assistant Energy Saver Allows you to set the device to save energy when not in use 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Energy Saver in the directory tree yx peo In the Energy Saver Mode area select one of the following mode e Intelligent Ready wakes up and sleeps automatically based on previous usage e Job Activated wakes up when activity is detected e Scheduled wakes up and sleeps at set times on a daily basis 3 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup 8 Select Fast Resume to On to reduce the time taken for the device to wake up This will change the default sleep low timeout and increase energy usage 9 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to retur
284. o add Print Services for UNIX if not already installed and click OK Click Next ope e ocn Add the Printer From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes The Vista path is Start Control Panel Printer s Select Add a Printer then Next Select Local Printer attached to this computer If already selected Deselect Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer Click Next Select Create a new port Select LPR from the Type of Port pull down menu then click Next Enter the IP Address of the printer Enter a name for the print queue and click OK Dew I o 0 You will be prompted for a printer driver Select Have Disk and browse to the location of your printer drivers 11 Select the INF file then click Open 12 When the Install from Disk screen appears verify that the path and file name are correct then click OK 13 Select the model of your device from the list Click Next 14 The Name your Printer screen appears Enter a printer name 15 Decide whether or not you want to make this printer your default printer then click Next 6 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print Drivers 16 The Printer Sharing Screen appears If you will be sharing this printer with other clients select the Share Name button and enter a share name Click Next 17 Enter a location and comment in the Location and Comment screen optio
285. o button Enter the IP Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the FTP location Type in the path to the location of the scan folder in Document Path Enter the full path to the directory starting at the root of FTP services For example directory name directory name Select a radio button for Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine user access to the file server Select Prompt at User Interface to have the file server determine user access Select System to have the system directly log in to the file server Enter a Login Name and Password if the system will be directly accessing the file server Click on the Save button to accept the changes To configure General Settings select General in the directory tree under Workflow Scanning To print a Confirmation Sheet after every scan job select On from the drop down menu The Confirmation Sheet specifies the status of the job and the file location if the scan was successful New distribution templates created for the device can be set to automatically update by entering a time in the Refresh Start Time area under Distribution Templates Note that Distribution Templates can System Administrator Guide 10 3 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 20 21 22 be created with specific scan settings and destinations For further information refer to Configuring the Default
286. o the etc hosts file on the SCO workstation Ensure that you can Ping the machine from the SCO workstation using the hostname found in the etc hosts file Perform the following steps to create a machine print queue on a SCO UNIX workstation using either the GUI or the TTY method GUI Method roe 09 EOS 9 10 11 12 Log in as root From the Main Desktop select icons System Administration Printers Printer Manager Select Printer Add Remote UNIX Enter the following information into the Add Remote UNIX Printer form Host hostname Where hostname is the machine hostname from the etc hosts file Printer name of the queue being created i e dc xxxq Select OK to complete the form Select OK at the Message window Select Host Exit Select File Close this directory Select File Close this directory Click Save at the warning confirmation window Type exit to log out of root account Open UNIX Window tty Method 1 2 Qv Mic Type su to become super user Type rlpconf to create a printer Enter the following information Printer Name queuename Remote Printer r Hostname hostname If the information has been entered properly type y Click Enter to accept default of a non SCO remote printer Click Enter to accept default of non default printer Click Enter to start process of adding queue Type q to quit the rlpconf program 5 34 System Adm
287. oaded If this software is not present install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft Then return to the next step in this document Um deca Ne Verify that Print Services for UNIX is loaded From the Start menu select Settings Select Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs Select Add Remove Windows Components Select Other Network File and Print Services Click Details Check the box to select Print Services for UNIX db We aS 6 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print Drivers 8 Click OK 9 Click Next 10 Close the Add Remove Programs window Add the Printer 1 From the Start menu select Settings and then Printers Printers and Faxes 2 Double click Add Printer and click on Next 3 16 Select Local Printer Windows 2000 or Local Printer attached to this computer Windows 2003 and deselect Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer 4 Click Next 5 Select Create a New Port 6 Select LPR Port from the Type of Port drop down menu and click Next Note LPR Port is only available when Print Services for UNIX is installed 7 Enterthe IP Address of the printer 8 Enterthe printer name 9 Click OK 10 You will be prompted for a printer driver Select Have Disk and click Browse Locate the Drivers folder on the CD 11 Select the required driver 12 Click Open and then OK 13
288. od for the device to authenticate users who access Internet Services from their workstations Select Locally on the Device to validate users listed in the Local User Information Database This option requires you to configure accounts in the Local User Information Database Select Remotely on the Network to validate users via an Authentication Server This option requires you to have a server that will provide authentication of user login details Authentication via Kerberos Solaris Windows 2000 NDS Novell SMB Windows NT4 2000 or LDAP is supported Select required method from the Authorization drop down menu The card reader and Authentication Solution authenticates validates the user The Authorization method determines which areas of the device a user is allowed to access There are two options Select Locally on the Device if you want the device to check the Local User Information Database for levels of authorization Select Remotely on the Network if you want to use an LDAP server to determine levels of authorization If you selected Remotely on the Network from the Location of Access Rights box configure LDAP communications as stated in the Configure Authentication for LDAP LDAPS in the Authentication section of this guide Check the checkbox next to Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP under Personalization is checked if you want to set the From address to the logged in user s
289. ogin button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Remotely on the Network from the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization Ensure that the Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP checkbox under Personalization is checked and click on the Save button to return to the Authentication Configuration page Note LDAP can also simply be used as an Information Personalization server supplying information to other Authentication servers being used on the network In the Current Configuration area click on the Configure button for Authentication Server In the Authentication Server page select LDAP from the Authentication Type drop down menu In the Configuration area click on the LDAP Settings link Under the Server Information area select either the IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button If IPv4 or IPv6 Address is selected enter the IP Address for Primary LDAP Server and Alternate LDAP Server or if Host Name is selected enter the details for Primary LDAP Server and Alternate LDAP Server The last field of the IP Address or Host Name should be used to supply the TCP port number of the L
290. ompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select HTTP in the directory tree The Keep Alive Timeout setting determines how long the device s Internet Services pages will wait for a response from a connected user before terminating the connection Enter the required number of seconds 1 60 in the Keep Alive Timeout entry box 9o T4 Gv Ut e OU NS Note Generally user connections will be adversely affected slow or kept busy if the Keep Alive Timeout is set for a longer period of time 9 The Maximum Connections setting is the maximum number of simultaneous connections that can occur at any given moment to Internet Services Enter a number from 8 32 to indicate the maximum number of clients that can be connected for example with open sockets to the HTTP server at any one time in the Maximum Connections entry box Note Before enabling the HTTP Security Mode the device must have a Machine Digital Certificate configured For information on Machine Digital Certificate see Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 10 To set the HTTP Security Mode select enable for the Secure HTTP SSL option 11 Change the HTTP Port Number if required The default is 80 12 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes How to verify the IP Address The device is configure
291. on and Authorisation 23 1 Configure a Fax Repository using FTP 23 2 Configure a Fax Repository using HTTP HTTPS 23 5 Configure a Fax Repository using SMB 23 4 23 7 Configure a Server Fax Filing Location Repository 23 2 Enable Server Fax 23 2 General Settings Configuration 23 6 Server Message Block SMB 10 6 Service Advertising Protocol SAP 5 26 SIM Card Inserting the SIM Card 2 2 SLP Settings on Windows XP 5 16 SMart eSolution Meter Assistant 3 10 SMart eSolutions 3 9 SMARTsend 10 1 SMB Server Message Block 10 2 SNMP Community Names 3 16 SNMP 3 15 Software Upgrade 3 17 21 1 22 1 Auto Upgrade 22 3 Auto 3 18 Upgrade via Internet Services 22 2 Software Version Verification 3 4 Solaris 2 x 5 32 Stateless Addresses 5 7 Static IP Addressing Configure 5 2 Verify 5 2 Subdirectory 11 3 Supplies Assistant 3 10 System Software Version 22 2 ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 T TCP IP and HTTP 2 5 TCP IP Settings on Windows XP 5 16 Template Distribution Repositories 10 11 TIFF Settings 3 6 Trays 4 4 Troubleshooting 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 E mail 24 3 Embedded Fax 24 8 Internet Fax 24 5 Network Accounting 24 9 Power On Off Button 24 10 Scanning via FTP 24 2 Scanning via HTTP S 24 3 Scanning via NCP 24 2 Scanning via SMB 24 3 Server Fax 24 7 Workflow Scanning 24 1 Trusted Certificate Authorities 8 16 Trusted Certificate Authorities 8 16 tty Method on HP UX Client
292. open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Select Upgrades in the directory tree In the Upgrades area check the Enabled box to enable Machine Software upgrade Click on the Apply button i9 00 Mi Gv Y De D IND System Administrator Guide 3 17 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Manual Upgrade At your Workstation Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Select Manual Upgrade in the directory tree Boe MA I Note Note the current software level in the Last Successful Upgrade box 8 Inthe Manual Upgrade box select Browse to locate the software upgrade file obtained earlier 9 Select the file and click Open 10 Click on the Install Software button to proceed with the upgrade The file will be sent to the printer and will disable the printing functionality The web browser will become inactive and you will not be able to acces
293. or another address 15 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes 5 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation Configure SNMP v3 Note SSL Secure Socket Layer must be enabled before you can configure SNMP v3 Click the Configure HTTPS link on the SNMP Internet Services screen to complete this task Once SSL is enabled return to the SNMP screen Before enabling the HTTP Security Mode the device must have a Machine Digital Certificate configured For information on Machine Digital Certificate see Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 16 From the Protocols link select HTTP in the directory tree 17 Select enable for the Secure HTTP SSL option 18 Change the HTTP Port Number if required The default is 80 19 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes 20 Check the Enable SNMP v3 Protocol box to enable SNMP v3 21 Click on the Edit SNMP v3 Properties button 22 Select the Create button within the Administrator Account area to create an administrator account 23 Enter the required data in the Authentication Key text box 24 Enter the required data in the Privacy Key text box 25 Select the Create button within the Print Drivers Account area 26 When you have finished configuring the settings click the Apply button SSDP Allows you to configure the SSDP Simple Service Discovery Protocol for Universal Plug and Play setting
294. ork 2 2222 8 20 PostScript R Passwords 222 n dete Se ades us des eed adds RUE b d a 8 23 Extensible Services Setup cis pss ers RE ER EE RR T ESGA 9 1 Workflow 260 iss ean be a EE REREREXRRDEH E ces 10 1 Configure a Scan Filing Location pp 10 2 File Transfer Protocol FTP sssssssssssss RR 10 2 NetWare NCP NetWare Core Protocol 9 10 4 Server Message Block SMB 4 10 6 UN PAR U UPS et ceteros et teda On bed dete a ie ME 10 8 Optional Step Configure General Settings pp 10 10 Configuring the Default Template 0 00 ccc cece cence eens 10 11 Other OPTIONS est oops s eee cadt erae ea e a E E O 10 13 Set up Remote Template Pool Repository pp 10 15 SCAN TO HOME 7 11 1 Enable and Configure Scan to Home 0 0 cece cece cence eens 11 2 Use Scan to Hore ecco er PIS EDEN ER DEG E EIE ES VENUS 11 3 Scan to Mailbox 0 12 1 Enable Scan to Mailbox RR 12 1 Use Scanito MailDOX cncccddccediadiy andiaddws titadteaddiadtwowdiadies 12 3 EM oad 0200 13 1 E mail Addressing sss he 13 1 E mail Authentication 0722122122 at 13 1 Information Checklist csse 13 1 Enable Gail Sure ewe lett whee Ranta me NS 13 2 Generalis cct E EM RE DUE 13 3 Scart to EGIL ances dic cime ote naire edt seme bd outs EEEN tue 13 4 Advanced Settings pp 13 4 Layout AdjUstment 2 nod neges oturttu en Dee ned fex x bI INS 13 4 002 13 5 E mail Image Settings 24e mde oed AER de
295. ormation The device s hard disk stores data similar to the way a hard drive functions on a personal computer but with the data encrypted for extra protection When Print Copy E mail Internet Fax and Scan jobs are submitted to the device information is stored on the device s hard disk if these features are installed and configured on the device The On Demand Overwrite feature can be used by a System Administrator to overwrite the image data The process takes approximately 20 minutes to complete The device is taken offline until the overwrite is complete and any existing jobs in the print queue are terminated Information Checklist Before starting the procedure please ensure the following item is available or has been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning in its existing configuration prior to installation Verify that On Demand Image Overwrite is an Installed Option If a Configuration Report did not print during SIM installation print the report as follows 1 Pressthe Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close ur oes dq Perform an Image Overwrite at the Device This procedure will overwrite the image data from the hard disk This excludes Embedded Fax data when this feature is installed on the device Note All existing jobs excluding Embedded Fax regardless of their state shall be delete
296. ors the same passwords could be used to secure the custom extensions Without a password in place anyone with slight knowledge of Postscript can potentially abuse the system They can use the Startjob and Exitserver operators change the system parameters and run jobs that can re define PostScript operators etc There are three passwords defined in the PostScript Password page as follows e Start Job Password A write only string Authorizes the use of startjob and exitserver e Run Start Job An integer Controls the execution of the Sys Start file which runs as an unencapsulated job and loads definitions into VM This parameter should only ever be set to 0 or 1 in normal use e System Parameters Password A write only string Controls use of the setsystemparams and setdevparams operators At your Workstation Open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click PostScript R Passwords in the directory tree GP pro p c On the PostScript R Passwords page in the Run Start Job area select either Disabled or Enabled for StartupMode 8 Enter details in the Password and Retype Password box for System Parameters Password and or Start Job Password 9 Youcan also check
297. ose the Properties box Right click the printer within the Printers folder and select Printing Preferences Select any required default settings in the printer driver For further information on Configuring the Printer Driver and Installation refer to the CentreWare Print Drivers Guide for Windows CD System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Print Drivers Apple Macintosh Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Verify the AppleTalk settings have been configured properly on the device by printing a Configuration Report To print a Configuration Report go to the Device Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages enpe Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close e Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD Review any README file contained with the printer drivers Install the Print Driver View the Configuration Report and note the Name given to the device under AppleTalk Settings At the Macintosh Workstation 1 Loadthe CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM into your CD drive 2 Openthe CD and locate the Drivers folder 3 Locate and open the Mac folder Instructions for 10 x OS X At the Macintosh Workstation 1 Load the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD ROM into your CD drive 2 Open the CD and select
298. ot an editable field Receipt of Internet Fax Messages Verify the device can also receive Internet Fax messages To do this touch the Internet Fax button touch the To button and enter the e mail address configured for the device Touch the Add button Place a document in the document handler and press the green start button The document should be received and printed as an Internet Fax job Internet Fax Addressing Once configured an internal and a public address book can be accessed when using the Internet Fax feature at the device Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP provides access to the internal corporate address book A public address book can be created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV file comma separated values file Both address book types can be configured for use on the device at the same time System Administrator Guide 14 5 Internet Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 14 6 System Administrator Guide Embedded Fax Embedded Fax enables users to send hard copy documents to another fax device or multiple fax devices via a telephone connection The Embedded Fax option requires a fax card to be fitted to the device and connected to a telephone line When you install the fax card and power on the device the Fax Setup window will appear on the screen with step by step instructions to lead you through the configuration The Fax Setup procedure can be undertaken immediately following installation
299. oximately 60minutes for a Full overwrite Note To cancel the overwrite procedure touch the lt Abort gt button Enter the current administrator password the default is 1111 and touch Enter The overwrite procedure may have already started at this stage but will return to normal operation Select the Back button if you want to continue with the overwrite 9 Following completion of the Overwrite the On Demand Overwrite completion screen appears Touch Close The network controller will reboot and network functionality will be unavailable for several minutes 10 Once rebooted the Disk Overwrite confirmation report will print This details the status and time of the overwrite To verify the overwrite has completed view the Confirmation Sheet under Confirmation Details The Job Information Status ESS Disk should read SUCCESS You have completed the steps Perform an Image Overwrite over the Network When the device has a network controller and is connected over the network it is possible to run the Image Overwrite function using a web browser This is performed using Internet Services Note All existing jobs regardless of their state shall be deleted and all job submission will be prohibited for the duration of the overwrite The power on off button will be ignored during image overwrite The device should not be in diagnostics mode when the Overwrite is started The device screen indicates a status of Diagnost
300. p button a new page will display allowing you to add the new protocol group 5 Inthe IP Protocol Group Details area enter details in the Group Name field 6 Enter details in the Description area 7 Checkthe required Service Name box 8 Inthe Custom Protocol area check the Custom Protocol box to select custom protocol enter details in the Service Name field 9 From the Protocol drop down menu select the protocol 10 Enter the port number in the Port field 11 Select either Server or Client from the Device is drop down menu Note The Service Name Protocol Type Port Number and Device is fields for a Custom Protocol will be disabled when its associated checkbox is unchecked 12 Click on the Save button Actions This option displays the list of actions associated with the IPsec security policies 1 2 Ov Om GE Click on the Actions tab under IPsec heading Actions can be deleted by highlighting a Action and clicking on the Delete button if the Action selected is not being used by a security policy then click on the OK button To add or edit a Action in the IP Protocol Group area click on the Add New Action button to add a new Action or highlight a Action and click on the Edit button to edit details of a Action If you change the name of a Action that is being used in Security policy then the updated action name shall also change in the security policy entry By clicking the Add
301. page Configure your LDAP Server Configure LDAP communications on the device as stated in the LDAP LDAPS topic see Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS on page 7 8 Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 12 In the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration 13 On the Service Registration screen check the boxes to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface 14 Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 15 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right 16 In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Access If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu 17 Click on the Apply button 18 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified 19 Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button Using Secure Access 1 Read the device s user interface prompt to determine what needs to be done to be authenticated at the device Authentication methods include swiping a card placing a proximi
302. r defines a passcode remotely using a web browser or locally at the device allowing users to authenticate to the system and use restricted services e Xerox Secure Access For information on this type of authentication refer to Xerox Secure Access on page 21 1 CAC Common Access Card PIV Personal Identification Verification For information on this type of authentication please refer to the CAC guide supplied with your device Authorization Overview Once a user has been authenticated the Authorization feature will validate the role of that user A user can be defined as a System Administrator an Accounting Administrator or a general user The Authorization feature verifies those areas of the device that a user is allowed to access according to their role There are two options for Authorization e Locally on the Device Internal Database refers to the database included on your device e Remotely on a network refers to networked databases such as LDAP System Administrator Guide 7 1 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 The administrator can specify the services and device pathways on a device that require authentication Services can be locked and or hidden so that unauthorized users cannot use or see them Pathways can be locked but not hidden Network Authentication Network Authentication can be enabled to prevent unauthorized use of installed device options for example Machine Status Pathway Job St
303. r the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then touch the Tools tab Touch Service Settings Touch the Fax Service Settings Touch Line 1 Setup or Line 2 Setup The Line 1 or 2 Setup screen appears 9o INOCOY UT de woe cl Select the required Dial Type For a tone line select Tone For a 10 pulse per second line select Pulse If in doubt touch Tone Note The Pulse Tone feature is not available in some countries 9 Touch the Fax Number button and enter the device s fax number by using the keypad Note Customers in the Czech Republic are advised to contact their Xerox Service Representative to perform this function 10 Optional step enter a Line Name for the device by touching Line Name and using the on screen keyboard to enter a maximum of 30 characters 11 Select the required option for the line by touching one of the buttons as follows under Options Send and Receive the device is capable of sending and receiving fax transmissions Send Only the device is only capable of sending faxes Receive Only the device is only capable of receiving faxes 12 Touch Save to exit the Line Setup screen 13 Touch Log In Out to exit the Tools pathway and the device will reboot with the new settings You have completed the steps For detailed information about other embedded fax features r
304. r users familiar with the AS 400 system especially those experienced with printing in an AS 400 environment The AS 400 must run V4R5 of OS 400 so that the SNMP drivers are present or V4R3 V4R4 with the most current PTFs installed The device must have port 9100 enabled Procedures to Enable Port 9100 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 0 Leave the Bidirectional and Maximum Connections settings at their default values 1 CS 49 099 DWCOYCEMS Ge UN Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job indicator 12 Leave the PDL Switching Enabled box at its default value 13 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values or Default AII to enter printer defaults for all settings recommended 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are
305. ral packages of documentation Configuration materials which are designed to ensure a fault free installation of the WorkCentre Please take a moment to review the provided materials before proceeding with the device installation ti For additional information documentation the latest print drivers and much more visit auon ages http www xerox com rt eSolutions 1 Have A Cloning File Configure Device Install Later R Don t Show Welcome Page Again Note 1 All Saved Jobs are stored as encrypted files if encryption of user data is enabled Encryption ensures that third parties cannot read print scan and email these files Note 2 This device features automatic supplies replenishment SECRET meter read and diagnostics For more details about these automated services please visit www xerox com smartesclutions Refer also to your Xerox sales and maintenance agreements To iscontinue automatic transmissions to Xerox please click here To see current status click here Em gt sae a 7 2007 XEROX CORPO aTIqn All rights reserved is a registered trademarklof Xerox Corporation 5 amp J Local intranet mmm Menu Panel Main Panel The Internet Services home page contains three panels without visible boundaries You can change the left and right panel sizes by dragging the boundary between them e Header Panel displays the header for all pages The header includes the CentreWare Intern
306. ress Subnet Mask and Gateway Address information by printing a Configuration Report To print a Configuration Report go to the Device Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages anpa Touch Configuration Report e Touch Print then touch Close e Locate the CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers CD This was delivered in the CentreWare Network Services Pack with your device Review any README file contained with the printer drivers To install printer drivers on Windows XP choose one of the following options e Connect to an existing print queue already created on a network server e Create a new print queue on the Windows XP workstation Connect to an Existing Print Queue 1 Atthe Windows XP Workstation verify that the TCP IP protocol stack is loaded select Start right click the My Network Places icon and select Properties 2 Right click on the Local Area Connection icon Select Properties 3 Verify that the Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol has been loaded it may be necessary to scroll down the list If this software is not present install it using the documentation provided by Microsoft Then return to the next step in this document From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes The Vista path is Start Control Panel Printer s Select Add a Printer The Welcome Page appears Click Next SNL OY um T Verify that A network printer or
307. rkflow Scanning option purchased from your Xerox Sales Representative and installed using a Feature Enablement Key This feature provides the ability to scan to mailboxes in the device and then retrieve documents from the device using the web browser This provides a convenient Workflow scanning feature for customers who do not wish to purchase and configure a separate networked server Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to installation e Ensure Workflow Scanning is enabled on the device e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional e Printa Configuration Report to verify that Workflow scanning Scan to File is an installed Option a Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close 5 2 7 Enable Scan to Mailbox 1 Atyour workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 and click on the Login button 4 Click on the Services link 5 Click on the Scan to Mailbox link 6 Ifnecessary select Enable
308. rn to the Server Fax Defaults screen Other settings such as Server Fax has the following setting that can be adjusted 2 Sided Scanning Content Type How Original was Produced and Resolution Image Quality has the following setting that can be adjusted Lighten Darken and Suppression System Administrator Guide 23 3 Server Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Layout Adjustment has the following setting that can be adjusted Original Orientation and Original Size Filing Options has the following setting that can be adjusted Delay Start 6 Tochange any feature settings within each setting area click on the Edit button select the feature to be changed and click on the Save button to return to the Server Fax Defaults screen At the Device 1 Press the Services button Touch the Server Fax icon Enter a valid fax number touch Add Load a document in the document handler and press the Start button 3 5 Verify that your fax is received at the specified fax device Configure a Fax Repository using SMB Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Create a shared folder to be used as a fax repository Note the Share Name of the folder and the Computer Name or Server Name e Create a user account and password for the device with full access rights to the fax repository Note the user ac
309. route scanned jobs to network servers After storage on the server the files can be retrieved at any properly configured networked workstation A dedicated file server is not required to receive scans A dedicated server is required however for the installation and use of SMARTsend software to remotely manage the pool of templates workflows displayed locally to device users if so desired Scanning is configured on the device using one of the file transfer options below e FTP File Transfer Protocol Requires an FTP server running on a server or a workstation e NetWare NCP NetWare Core Protocol Available for filing to a NetWare server e SMB Server Message Block Available for filing to an environment that supports the SMB protocol e HTTP HTTPS Supports scans to a web server using a CGI script File Transfer Protocol FTP Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure thot File Transfer Protocol FTP services are running on the Server or Workstation where images scanned by the device will be stored 10 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Workflow Scanning Write down the IP Address or Host Name Create a folder within the FTP root This is the Scan Repository Write down the Directory Path Structure Create a user account and password which has read and write access to the folder within the FTP root
310. rver s settings have not been changed At the Device 1 Pressthe Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close Ux oe cq If the fault requires further investigation refer to the Xerox website at www xerox com for further support Power On Off Button The Power On Off button is located on the right front of the device Press the button to the On I position to power on the device If the device does not show signs of powering on with lights flashing on the user interface for example check the circuit breaker and power cable located at the lower right rear of the device The circuit breaker must be set to the On I position The power cable must be plugged in to the device as well as to a live source of electric power 24 10 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Troubleshooting When switching off the device press the button to the Off O position The printer will power off quickly however for the system to be fully powered off you must observe the network activity light on the Controller at the rear of the device When the network activity light stops blinking the Controller has shut off and the entire system is powered off Font Management Utility and Unicode A Unicode font kit is available for this device Installation of the Unicode fonts per the kit s instructions provides the required charact
311. rvices left hand menu Click the Manage Accounting link In the Users area click the Add New User button Enter an ID for the user in the User ID field The user ID can contain alphanumeric characters to a maximum of 32 characters for example A10 User ID s must be unique Enter the user name for example Jane Smith in the User Name field The user name can contain a maximum of alphanumeric characters User names must be unique Usage Limits 17 Specify the usage limits for this account in the User Limits boxes The maximum value for each limit is 16 000 000 Usage limits can be specified as follows Black or Color Printed Impressions The maximum number of documents that can be printed by a user from their workstation via the printer driver Black or Color Copied Impressions The maximum number of copies that can be produced by a user via the Copy feature on the device 19 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Standard Accounting Network Images Sent The maximum number of documents that can be sent over the network by the user This applies to the following features Workflow Scanning E mail Server Fax and or Internet Fax when these features are installed on the device Note If the device is set to print scan confirmation reports or Internet Fax acknowledgement reports these documents are counted towards the user s limit Fax Images Sent If Embedded Fax is installed on your device
312. s Click the Glossary link next to Status Codes in the Recipient Group Preferences area for further information about the Status Codes 13 Enter the number of minutes for the Set Jam Timer for release of status to selected groups 0 60 minutes 14 Click on the Apply button to save your settings 15 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified To Edit or Delete a Recipient Address 1 Select the address from the Group list and click on the Edit button 2 Select either e edit make the required changes and click on the Replace button e To delete select an address from the Group list click on the Delete button System Administrator Guide 3 11 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 3 When you have finished making changes click on the Apply button to save or Undo to cancel The Settings confirmed Send test e mail window will appear Click on the OK button if you wish to send a test e mail to the Alert Notification recipient s or Cancel to return to the Alert Notification page Billing Meter Read Alerts Using this dialog System Administrators can set up an e mail notification to the designated Billing Administrator whenever billing meters are automatically read by the Meter Assistant To Set up a Billing Meter Read Alert 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and
313. s and the memory settings The items displayed will depend on the model and configuration of the device Configuration Overview This page displays the device configuration overview displays information on Connectivity and Printing if Services are configured or not if Cloning is configured or not 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Configuration Overview link Description This page displays the following information and allows you to set and view information related to the device such as the name and installation location of the device e Machine Model e Product Code Serial Number e Device Name e Location 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Description link If Device Name and Location are changed click on the Apply button to accept the changes 4 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 CentreWare Internet Services General Setup Configuration The Configurat
314. s link Select Setup in the directory tree Sow m The first time you access the Authentication Configuration screen you will be asked to change the System Administrator Password The System Administrator password is used to access Tools at the device user interface and change settings via Internet Services If you do not see the Device System Administrator Password screen go to the Configure Authentication instructions below 8 Entera new password in the New Password and Retype New Password areas IMPORTANT Do not forget the password or you could be completely locked out of the system requiring a service call Note The default User Name cannot be changed 9 Click Next Configure Authentication 10 On the Authentication Configuration page from the Device User Interface Authentication drop down menu select Xerox Secure Access 11 Select your required option from the Web User Interface Authentication drop down menu When a user attempts to access Internet Services they are prompted to enter their login information The option selected from the web user interface Authentication menu defines how the device will validate the user s rights to access Internet Services This is required because if the user normally authenticates at the device with a card reader there would be no method for the device to authenticate users who access Internet Services from their workstations Select Locally on the Device
315. s bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Raw TCP IP Printing in the directory tree Ensure the Enabled box is checked to enable Raw TCP IP Printing Protocol Leave the TCP Port Number set to 9100 for Port 1 If two additional ports are available click Default All to see if they are set to 9101 and 9102 respectively emulating HP JetDirect EX Plus 3 10 Leave the Bidirectional checkboxes and Maximum Connections settings at their default values jo NOM 2 9 11 Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job indicator 12 Leave the PDL Switching checkbox enabled at its default value 13 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device System Administrator Guide 5 13 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Create an IPP Printer at your Workstation Verify the correct software is loaded 1 Atthe Desktop right click the My Network Places icon Select Properties Right click the Local Area Connection icon Click Properties Verify that the
316. s on the device 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select SSDP in the directory tree Check the Protocol Enabled box to enable SSDP 9 Enter a setting in the Cache Control box Oo oy Ui IT w 10 Enter a setting in the Time to Live box 11 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes Microsoft Networking and WINS Windows Internet Naming Service Configure Microsoft Networking 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 System Administrator Guide 5 11 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select Microsoft Networking in the directory tree dE Check the Enabled box under Protocol to enable Microsoft Networking 9 Enter the maximum number of connections allowed in Maximum Connections The range is 10 30 10 Enter the Connection Timeout in the available box The range
317. s the device via this method until the upgrade has completed and the device has rebooted The upgrade should take no longer than 15 minutes 11 Once the device has completed the upgrade it will reboot automatically The configuration report will print if it was enabled in the Tools set up When the device is accessible from a web browser view the software version on Internet Services Manual Upgrade page or check the configuration report to verify that the software level has changed Note Your device can be set to automatically schedule device software upgrades from a central server at a specific time on a regular basis For instructions click the Software Upgrade link to the left of the page and select Auto You have completed the steps to perform a manual software upgrade Software Upgrade Auto Your device can be set to automatically schedule device software upgrades from a central server A WARNING This procedure will delete any current jobs in the device print queue and prevent further jobs from printing until the upgrade has completed If you wish to preserve these jobs allow them to complete before upgrading your software All configured network settings and installed options will be retained by the device after the Software Upgrade process Before You Start Determine your current System Software Version number 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press
318. sentative to perform this task 7 Optional step enter a Line Name for the device by touching the Keyboard icon and touching the characters A maximum of 30 characters may be entered 8 Touch Save 9 Touch Next 10 The Line Settings window appears Select the required option for the line by touching one of the buttons as follows Send and Receive the device is capable of sending and receiving fax transmissions Send Only the device is only capable of sending faxes Receive Only the device is only capable of receiving faxes 11 Touch Next 12 Touch Save to exit the Line Setup Complete screen 13 Touch Save to save the Fax Install Complete screen The device will reboot with the new settings 14 Test the fax connection by sending a fax document Press the Services button 15 Touch the Fax icon button 16 Enter the number of a nearby fax device using the keypad and touch the Add button 17 Place your documents in the document handler and press the Start button 18 Verify that your documents are received at the other fax device You have completed the embedded fax setup 15 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Embedded Fax Configure Fax Settings This procedure is only necessary if you have not yet configured the fax settings or if you have already fitted the fax card and wish to change any settings for the fax option At the Device Press the Log In Out button to ente
319. sing 169 254 16 IPv4 addressing over the same physical or logical link such as in ad hoc or isolated non DHCP networks Refer to the IETF website for zeroconf details Check the Enable box for Multicast DNS to resolve host names to IPv4 addresses without using a conventional DNS server DHCP DDNS 19 Check the Enable box for Release Registration if you want the device to release DHCP resources when the device is powered down Zero Configuration Networking 20 Check the Enable box for Self Assigned Address to allow the device to assign itself an IP address of 169 254 x x This is useful in situations where the device cannot connect to the DHCP server to obtain an IP address 21 Check the Enable box for Multicast DNS if you want to enable the device to perform DNS queries over IP Multicast This is essential for the Apple Rendezvous protocol to map a host name to an IP address used to advertise the services of the device 22 Click on the Apply button to accept changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous value 23 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note Changing the device IP Address will impact other protocols NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP Printing These protocols will need to reference the new IP Address Disabling TCP IP will impact other protocols NetBIOS IP LPR LPD FTP SNMP and Raw TCP IP Printing
320. ss If you select Custom Access for each feature you can either select Unlocked or Locked from the drop down menu Click on the Apply button Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Select Logout in the upper right corner of your screen if you are still logged in as Administrator and click on the Logout button System Administrator Guide 7 9 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Configure Filters for LDAP 1 2 SO 0 OY UT Dew 11 12 13 14 15 If you are continuing from Step 31 in the previous procedure Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS click the Custom Filters heading tab under the LDAP title If you have already logged out of Internet Services or closed your browser at a networked workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocol link Select LDAP in the directory tree Click on Custom Filters heading tab under the LDAP title Onthe Custom Filters screen under LDAP Authentication area check to select Append Base DN box When enabled this will specify the distinguished name s that will lead to the entry in the LDAP directory und
321. ss Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Services link Click on the Workflow Scanning link Select Default Template in the directory tree Scroll to the Workflow Scanning area click on the Edit button 9 CO OM OY UT WN Within Workflow Scanning scroll to the Original Type area select either the Photo amp Text Text Map or Newspaper Magazine radio button 10 Then select the for OCR radio button in the Scan Presets area 11 Click on the Apply button 12 Scroll to Filing Options area click on the Edit button 13 Within Filing Options for File Format select one of either TIFF mTIFF JPEG PDF PDF A or XPS radio button 14 Scroll down to Searchable Options within File Format and select the Searchable radio button 15 Click on the Apply button 16 Under Workflow Scanning Image Settings area click on the Edit button 17 Within Searchable XPS PDF amp PDF A Defaults area under Searchable Options select the Searchable radio button and the correct language for your device 18 Click on the Apply button At the Device 1 Press the Services button 2 Touch the Workflow Scanning icon 3 Input documents to scan and touch the Start button System Administrator Guide 3 7 General Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Accessing
322. ss Book The Internet Services Public Address Book screen allows you to upload a list of names and e mail addresses which can be accessed via the Public Address Book at the device The Public Address Book consists of a text file a CSV Comma Separated Values format The majority of word processing or spreadsheet packages will allow you to create a CSV file A selection of E mail applications will also allow you to export a list of users in the CSV file format There are also several conversion packages available on the web The E mail or Internet Fax services must be enabled at the device to access the Public Address Book 13 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 E mail Create a Public Address Book 1 Openan application that supports CSV files for example Microsoft Excel 2 Createa list of addresses with the following headings name and address For example name firstname lastname company com name2 firstname lastname company com name3 firstname lastnameG company com The order in which entries are displayed in the Public Address Book at the device will depend on how the entries are sorted in the CSV file 3 Savethe file as a CSV comma separated values file with the extension csv 4 Werecommended that you keep a copy of the CSV file once created At your Workstation 5 Openthe web browser enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 6 Click on the Properties tab
323. ss of the device in the address bar and press Enter The device s Internet Services web page will appear If you do not have a web browser test connectivity by pinging the IP address of the device from your network accounting server Enable and Configure Network Accounting When you purchased the Network Accounting Kit you received the information and SIM required to install this feature Following the supplied instructions for full details with the device powered on the SIM is inserted into an orange slot on the device s backplane An Options Assist screen pops up to help with installation System Administrator Guide 20 1 Network Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 To Enable the Network Accounting feature at the Device Sy pu Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab Touch Accounting Settings Touch Accounting Mode Touch Network Accounting and touch Save Configure Network Accounting Svr go es 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button then the Tools tab Touch Accounting Settings Touch Accounting Mode Touch the Network A
324. start the device NDPS NEPS For The Xerox NDPS NEPS Agent documentation and printer drivers visit the Xerox website at WWW Xerox com Novell Distributed Print Services NDPS Novell Enterprise Print Services NEPS are products built on Novell s printing architecture Which allow administrators to take advantage of built in printer intelligence to centrally manage network printing resources from anywhere on the network improve network printing performance and reduce the difficulty of network printing for end users The Xerox NDPS NEPS Solution allows you to use Novell NDPS NEPS with many of the latest Xerox printers It includes administrative tools that snap in to NWAdmin that enables users to easily configure and manage their network print services Tt also has a set of NetWare Loadable modules that run on the NetWare server NetWare users have the ease of automatically creating a printer object in the NDS tree and automatic driver download capability eliminating individual driver installation by downloading the driver as users connect to a printer Network users can perform remote up to the minute status checks or define meaningful notifications for their Xerox network printers System Administrator Guide 5 27 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 500 Raw TCP IP Printing to Port 9100 CRTDEVPRT This is the procedure to set up printing to a device from an AS 400 using the SNMP drivers This procedure is intended fo
325. t Set the date format required Touch Next Set the date by touching the buttons and pressing the numbers on the keypad Touch Next Set the clock format Touch Next Set the time touch Next Set the Greenwich Meantime Offset according to the country you are in Touch Next Oo Qv oT oe t9 Ascreen will appear to indicate that you have successfully completed the Xerox Installation Wizard Touch Finish The device will save the settings and reboot If enabled a configuration report will print Administrator Access The lt Log In Out gt button provides access to the Administrator Tools area Administrator access is required to change settings such as network information on the device 1 Press the Log In Out gt button on the Control Panel 2 Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter the Password 1111 then touch Enter 3 Press the lt Machine Status gt button 4 Touch the Tools tab Print a Configuration Report to Verify Current Device Settings Note A Configuration Report should have printed when the device was powered off then on during Power Cable and Ethernet Cable installation If necessary perform the following steps Press the lt Machine Status gt button on the device Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close fw 2 4 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9
326. t Touch Print then touch Close gn 5 5 32 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation The Configuration Report will print Verify the addresses detailed under TCP IP Settings To Configure your Solaris 2 x Client e Ensurethe machine is connected to the network with Ethernet cabling e Ensure you can PING the machine IP address from the UNIX workstation Addthe machine printer hostname to the etc hosts file Note Perform the following steps to create a machine print queue on a Solaris 2 x workstation using either the GUI or the TTY method GUI Method Open a command window from the desktop Type su to become super user Type admintool to run the System Administrator Tool Select Browse Printers Select Edit Add Access to Printer Enter the following information into the Access to Remote Printer form 9x uv gb ow Printer Name queuename Where queuename is the name of the queue being created Print Server hostname Where hostname is the machine hostname from the etc hosts file Click OK to complete the form 7 Type sh to run the Bourne shell 8 Type lpadmin p queuename s hostname lp to modify the remote queuename 9 Type exit to exit the Bourne shell and exit to exit super user mode 10 Test the queue created Type the command lp d queuename etc hosts tty Method 1 Type su to become super user 2 Type sh to run the Bourne shell 3
327. t is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Select Internationalization in the directory tree ws Specify the locale select the required setting from the Selected Locale drop down menu The device will make an assumption on the encoding that are most likely used 8 If you want to enter the specific encoding of user strings provided for the device select Custom form the Selected Locale drop down menu and select the required encoding priority order 9 Click on the Apply button to save your changes Job Deletion The Job Deletion page allows you to set permission that allow System Administrators or non administrator users to delete jobs from the device print queue Note System Administrators can always delete any job regardless of the setting selected on the Job Management Page At the Device 1 Press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter 3 Pressthe Machine Status button 3 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 General Setup Touch the Tools tab Touch Security Settings Touch Authentication Touch Job Deletion Touch either Qo wi gy cum Es e All Users to allow any user to delete any job in the job list There is no authentication needed when the user clicks on a job in the job list and selects
328. t the device and stored in a job log Jobs require an authentication of User ID and Account ID and this information is logged with the job details in the job log The device requires the Network Accounting Kit to be installed and network access to a Xerox certified Network Accounting third party software solution Refer to your Xerox Sales Representative for further information CentreWare Print and Fax Drivers are required to be installed on workstations The user is prompted for accounting information when submitting jobs to the device The job log information can be compiled at the accounting server and formatted into reports Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensurethe device is fully functioning on the network prior to installation e Locate the Network Accounting Kit Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 This is required to access CentreWare Internet Services to configure Network Accounting e Install and configure the Xerox certified network accounting solution package on your network Refer to the manufacturer s instructions with the network accounting package to complete this task Test communication between the accounting server and the device To do this Go to your network accounting server and open a web browser Enter the IP Addre
329. te address book A public address book can be created from a list of names and addresses saved in a CSV comma separated values file Internet Fax Authentication and Authorization Authentication Service Access Control can be enabled on the device to prevent unauthorized access to the network options If Authentication is enabled a user will be prompted to enter a user name and password or a PIN before they can access the Internet Fax feature For a full description of the Authentication feature refer to Authentication on page 7 1 of this guide Authentication can be configured after Internet Fax has been installed System Administrator Guide 14 1 Internet Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network prior to enabling Internet Fax e Install the Scanning Hardware Kit Refer to the instructions contained with the Workflow Scanning E mail Kit to complete this task Contact your Xerox Sales Representative if you do not have the Scanning Hardware Kit e Ensure TCP IP and HTTP are configured on the device as per Enable TCP IP and HTTP at the Device on page 2 5 This is required to access the device s Internet Services web pages which can be used to configure Internet Fax settings from a network connected workstation s web browser For instructions on ho
330. te a user account and password with access to the scan directory When a document is scanned the device logs in using the account transfers the file to the server and then logs out Note the user account and password Test your settings by logging in to the scan directory from a PC with the user account and password Create a new folder within the directory and then delete the folder If you cannot perform this function check the user account access rights At your Workstation 1 Openthe web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Services link 6 Click on the Workflow Scanning link 7 Select File Repository Setup in the directory tree 8 Click on the Add New button in the File Repository Setup area or the Edit button If the default File 10 11 12 13 14 15 Repository has been set Note During device configuration SMARTsend if used overwrites the Default Repository and Template Pool scan settings If certain applications will use Default Repository settings not matching SMARTsend settings reconfigure the applications to use an Alternate Repository before configuring the device with SMARTsend s Add Update feature Enter a name for the filing destination template in the Friendly Name
331. tem V and BSD For the example of CUPS built and installed on a FreeBSD 4 2 machine from the source code run cupsd from usr local sbin cd usr local sbin cupsd and press Enter 2 Type http localhost 631 admin into the address URL box of your web browser and press Enter 3 For User ID type root For the requested password type the root password 4 Click Add Printer and follow the on screen prompts to add the printer to the CUPS printer list Printing with CUPS CUPS supports the use of both the System V Ip and Berkeley lpr printing commands Use the d option with the lp command to print to a specific printer Ip dprinter filename Enter Use the P option with the lpr command to print to a specific printer Ipr Pprinter filename Enter 5 36 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation For complete information on CUPS printing capabilities see the CUPS Software Users Manual available from www cups org documentation php System Administrator Guide 5 37 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 5 38 System Administrator Guide Print Drivers This chapter summarizes the print driver features and functions You can use Internet Services to configure the Print Drivers e Windows 2000 2003 Server on page 6 2 e Windows 2000 Professional on page 6 4 e Windows XP on page 6 7 e Windows Vista on page 6 10 e Apple Macintosh on page 6 13 System Administrator Guide 6 1
332. tform this server based software works with new and legacy Multifunction Systems to enable hardcopy documents to be scanned in black and white or color and converted into such standard digital formats as PDF JPEG and TIFF This web based application requires no additional client software installation and uses wizards to simplify workflow template creation Once a workflow or distribution process is created it can be saved as a paper or electronic cover sheet The cover sheet can be set up to direct the scanned file to a wide variety of destinations Such destinations include an e mail address or distribution list network folder FTP folder remote printer web URL Domino doc Domino Microsoft SharePoint and Xerox DocuShare Scan to PC Desktop For information regarding the additional use of Scan to PC Desktop including Scansoft Paperport and Textbridge Pro applications consult your Xerox Sales Representative Workflow Scanning User Authentication Authentication can be enabled to prevent unauthorized access to the Workflow Scanning feature If Authentication is enabled users will be prompted to enter a network user name and password or a PIN before they can access the Workflow Scanning feature For a full description of the Authentication feature refer to the Authentication section of this guide Authentication can be configured after Workflow Scanning has been installed System Administrator Guide 10 1 Workflow Scanning ColorQube
333. the Device on page 2 5 Ensure Workflow Scanning is installed properly on the device At the device verify that you have a Workflow Scanning button on the device screen interface and that this is not grayed out or unavailable It may be necessary to press the Services button to view the Workflow Scanning button on screen Is the Workflow Scanning Button Available on the Device If there is no Workflow Scanning button available on the device install the Scanning Kit and configure the Workflow Scanning feature For instructions refer to Workflow Scanning on page 10 1 Note If you have installed Workflow Scanning but the button is grayed out or unavailable at the device press the Log In Out button Enter the Administrator s User Name default is 1111 touch Next enter Password default is 1111 touch Enter touch the Tools tab and touch User Interface Settings Touch Service Enablements then Workflow Scanning set the service to Enable and touch Save Reboot the device with the Power On Off button For instructions on use of the Power On Off button click the Previous Menu button at the top of this page then click the button labeled Power On Off Button When you perform a scan a Scan Confirmation Report prints if it has been enabled The Scan Confirmation Report will report a job status of SUCCESS or FAILED System Administrator Guide 24 1 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Try to scan a document Does th
334. the Select to save new password box for System Parameters Password and or Start Job Password 10 When finished click on the Apply button System Administrator Guide 8 23 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 8 24 System Administrator Guide Extensible Services Setup Xerox Extensible Interface Platform EIP is a software platform inside many Xerox MFPs that allows independent software vendors and developers personalized and customized document management solutions that you can access directly from the MFP touch screen These solutions can leverage your existing infrastructure and databases For example a hospital could customize the device to help manage patient forms By touching an icon on the display a healthcare worker could access the hospital s web based document management system and browse a list of patient forms Users can quickly scan and capture paper documents preview thumbnails and add them to frequently used document storage locations For example A tutor can scan notes directly to a specific course repository for students to access A student can scan assessment papers to their course folder for their tutor to mark Xerox Extensible Interface Platform utilizes web based Xerox Partner solutions including e Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System Secure Access integrates with your personalized ID badge This convenient security solution allows people to simply swipe their ID badge at the device to unlock access
335. the Template Pool a repository on the network then enter the required time for the update in the Refresh Start Time area 9 Toupdate the Template Pool List manually click on the Refresh Template List Now button Note The Refresh Template List capability only applies to templates stored in a Template Pool Templates stored on the device are updated automatically Template Distribution Repositories 10 Login Source control user access to a pool of templates stored on a remote server Communications to the server including entry of the required device Login Name and Password are set up by selecting Advanced then Template Pool Setup in the Internet Services directory tree Select Authenticated User to have the Authentication Server control remote template pool access Select Prompt at User Interface to have a standalone server prompt device users for access This works well for small offices without an Authentication server Select Prompt if Authenticated User Does Not Match Template Owner to prompt authenticated users accessing templates containing either no or other users owner names Job Log 11 Click on the Username and Domain Tree Realm boxes if you want these to appear in the Job Log when users log in to the device when Network Authentication is enabled 12 Click on Apply Configuring the Default Template The default template is created for the device using Internet Services or SMARTsend software on
336. the device is connected to the network e Static IP Address for the device e Subnet Mask Address for the device e Gateway Address for the device e Host Name for the device Enter a Static IP Address At the device and press the lt Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press the Machine Status button and then the Tools tab Touch Network Settings Touch TCP IP Settings Touch TCP IP Enablement Touch Enable for IPv4 and IPv6 D C HC NS 5 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Network Installation 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Touch Save Touch Dynamic Addressing Touch Disabled to disable DHCP Touch Save Touch IP Address Host Name Touch button under the IPv4 Address heading enter the IP Address using the on screen keypad Touch Host Name Type the host name EXACTLY as you want it to appear To access more characters touch 123 on the user interface Touch Save then touch Close Touch Subnet and Gateway Touch Subnet Mask enter the Subnet Mask address using the on screen keypad Repeat this process for the IP Gateway When you are finished touch Save to accept the changes and return to the TCP IP Settings screen Touch Close twice to return to the feature menu Touch Advance
337. the required language if necessary 3 Double click to open the Drivers folder 4 Double click to open the Mac folder 5 Double click to open the folder containing the drivers for version 10 x 6 Double click to open the machine model dmg 7 Double click to open the machine model pkg file 8 When the Welcome screen displays click Continue 9 Click Continue then Agree to accept the Licence Agreement 10 Select the required disk if necessary where you want to install the printer Click Continue 11 Click Install 12 Click Close and restart the workstation 13 When the workstation has restarted double click the hard drive icon 14 Double click the Applications icon System Administrator Guide 6 13 Print Drivers ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Double click the Utilities folder Double click the Printer Setup Utility icon Double click the Add button to add a new printer or click the Printers menu and click on Add Printer Select IP Printing from the top menu Select Internet Protocol Printing or LPD LPR Printing from the next menu Enter the IP address of the printer Enter a name for the print queue You may leave this blank if you prefer Select Xerox from the Printer Model list Select your printer model from the Model Name list Click Add The device will appear in the Printer List Sel
338. their job their XSA allocation is reduced by the number of prints copies or scans performed When XSA is enabled users must enter their account details in the printer driver to print documents from their workstations The XSA feature is mutually exclusive from any other accounting feature If XSA is enabled at the device you cannot enable Foreign Device Interface Auditron or Network Accounting Each device supports a maximum of 2500unique XSA user IDs e 500 General Accounts e 500 Group Accounts All user IDs must be assigned to one or more group accounts Note The XSA settings and account data are stored in the device It is strongly recommended that you back up the settings and data regularly using the Cloning procedure available through the Internet Services screens Should the device lose your XSA data and settings you can restore them from the backup file that you produced by the Cloning process Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed Ensure that your device is configured on the network e Ensure that the TCP IP and HTTP protocols are configured on the device and fully functional System Administrator Guide 19 1 Xerox Standard Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Enable Xerox Standard Accounting din N Or D At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar
339. thentication Configuration for SMB Windows NT4 and SMB Windows 2000 2003 1 sen headin aa gh be RUE P Lb eeteede Wena day 7 7 Authentication Configuration for LDAP LDAPS 7 7 8 Local Authentication ssa sesex ec xr x Re X REREEIRRRAERC BERN ERCSERS 7 12 802 1X Authentication pp 7 13 Xerox Secure ACCESS pree pelon erna EE n Moga mde ew ee AER RE 7 15 Secure Access and Accounting pp 7 15 Information Checklist ssec 7 15 Enable Web User Interface Authentication pp 7 17 ulpa PD o 8 1 Security 9 XeroX xscecseepests tes Soc He cs ies DER e une io ete Cad s 8 1 User Data Encryption 225 8 1 User Information Database PTT 8 2 Password Settings pp 8 3 Admin Password 52 3 220 dbs ade obU E ARP het REP WI A Ea het BA APR E 8 3 lli seine a ATA ead ead 8 4 Audit LOG eT 8 5 View 8 6 Machine Digital Certificate Management pp 8 9 cn LE 8 12 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 11 12 13 14 15 Security Policies To enable IP Sec 6 ccc cece 8 12 Host GrOups 2 iiscaisdceddecs died esame ies datbaed S ONAD ID ESAE Ed 8 13 Protocol GIOUDS se isses eR onan ena manda 8 E RKUGRKG eae Sse 8 14 ACCIONS eed de LLL EE UM EL qr 8 14 Trusted Certificate Authorities scis 8 16 2 8 17 On Demand nics ecc beet au ed Reo pee et drach de dadas 8 19 Perform an Image Overwrite over the Netw
340. thods Step 3 of 3 Authentication Configuration Wizard This page displays what configuration is Authenticated Authorized and Personalized This page is used for confirming or editing the authentication options that were established using the Authentication Configuration Wizard Once the Authentication Configuration Wizard is completed click on the Finish button Authentication Configuration The following steps are written as subsequent use assuming that the initial Authentication Configuration Wizard has previously been completed Authentication Configuration for Kerberos Solaris 1 99 o Gv UL 1 US UNS 10 11 12 13 14 15 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Click on the Access Rights link Select Setup in the directory tree The Authentication Configuration page is displayed in the Current Configuration area click on the Edit Methods button for Authentication Next in the Where is the Information Located area select Remotely on the Network form the drop down menu for Device User Interface Authentication and Authorization Ensure that the Automatically retrieve user s e mail address from LDAP checkbox under Personalization is chec
341. tional Creating a remote queue LPR on the AS400 1 At the command line issue CRTOUTQ and press F4 then F9 for additional parameters The setup is as follows Note ONLY CHANGE THE PARAMETERS IN BOLD e Output queue queue name e Library Library name e Maximum spooled file size e Number of pages NONE e Starting time Time e Ending time Time e Order of files on queue FIFO Remote system INTNETADR e Remote printer queue virtual printer name Note The queue for ColorQube should be Ip lower case L and P e Writers to autostart 1 e Queue for writer messages QSYSOPR e Library LIBL e Connection type IP e Destination type OTHER System Administrator Guide 5 29 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Transform SCS to ASCIT YES Manufacturer type and model IBM42011 SEE NOTE BELOW Workstation customizing object xxxxxxxx leave as default Library xxxxxxxx leave as default Internet address xx xxx x xx IP address of printer VM MVS class SAME Forms control Buffer SAME Destination options XAIX Text description Display any file NO Job separators 0 Operator controlled YES Data Queue NONE Library Authority to check DTAAUT 2 Press Enter to create Note The Workstation Customizing Object is the file that was created in the Create a Device Description on page 5 28 step 2 3 Atthis point a spool file document should be able to be sent to
342. tly log in to the file server Supply remote server addressing and login credentials 14 15 e Referring to the on line Help in the upper right corner of the Internet Services screen provide the network address to the remote server and the directory path on the server to the template files Note that the format for a directory path for FTP is directory directory while the format for a directory path for SMB is directory directory e Provide a Login account Name and server Password for the system to access the remote server This is mandatory for use with a SMARTsend server For information on creating accounts on the SMARTsend server refer to the FreeFlow SMARTsend Installation and Administration Guide Note that these accounts directly support the Login Source settings accessed by clicking General under Workflow Scanning in Internet Services Enter a Login Name and Password if the system will be directly accessing the file server Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values System Administrator Guide 10 15 Workflow Scanning ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 10 16 System Administrator Guide Scan to Home The Scan to Home feature is supported through the Workflow Scanning service Essentially it is a template file xst stored locally on the device but in a different directory to the Workflow scanning templates or mailbox folders Users access the Scan to
343. tname to the etc hosts file on the HP UX workstation or DNS server 2 Ensurethat you can ping the machine from the HP UX workstation using the hostname found in the etc hosts file 3 Use either the GUI method or the tty Method as follows GUI Method Open a command window from the desktop Type su to become super user Type sam to start the System Administrator Manager SAM Select the Printers and Plotters icon Select lp spooler Select Printers and Plotters Select Actions Add Remote Printer Plotter Enter the following information into the Add Remote Printer Plotter form BY wr Bee ee cs e Printer Name printer name Where printer name is the name of the queue being created e Remote System Name hostname Where hostname is the machine hostname from the etc hosts file System Administrator Guide 5 31 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 e Select Remote Printer is on a BSD System and click OK to complete form 9 Click Yes at the Configure HP UX Printers Subpanel screen This screen may be obscured by Add Remote Printer Plotter form 10 Select File Exit 11 Select File Exit Sam 12 Type exit to exit super user mode 13 Test the queue created Type the command lp d queuename etc hosts tty Method Follow the steps below to use the HP System Administrator Manager SAM GUI Graphical User Interface Note Refer to the HP UX documentation for additional
344. to change more specialized settings for the device Information Checklist Before accessing Internet Services please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e The device must be physically connected to the network with TCP IP enabled so that Internet Services can be accessed from a web browser e An existing operational workstation with TCP IP Internet or Intranet accessibility is required e HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol should be enabled on the device HTTP is enabled by default If you need to enable HTTP see Enable HTTP on the device on page 4 1 Enable HTTP on the device HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTP must be enabled on the device in order to access the embedded HTTP server Press the Log In Out button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press Machine Status then touch the Tools tab Touch Network Settings Touch Advanced Settings Touch Continue Touch HTTP Settings Touch Enable 9 Touch Save 10 Touch Close 11 Press the Log In Out gt button touch Logout to exit the Tools Pathway go Y Ux De pU NX I3 System Administrator Guide 4 1 CentreWare Internet Services ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Access Internet Services Instructions to access Internet Services 1 Openthe web browser from your Workstation 2 Inthe URL field enter http followed by the
345. to create more than one Alert Notification group select the group number and add e mail addresses to the group To Assign Notification Alerts to a Group a Scroll down to the Recipient Group Preferences area By default a group will be notified of all device alerts If you want to select specific alerts select the alerts that you want Group 1 to be notified of b Click the Glossary link next to Status Codes in the Recipient Group Preferences area for further information about the Status Codes as below e Machine is stopped device has stopped all functions or has been turned off e Potential persistent problems exist If area specified does not receive attention problems may re occur e Machine requires administrator assistance Authorized System Administrator must address problem e Machine is operational but degraded device is running at reduced efficiency needs immediate attention e Paper supply is low Paper is running low or wrong size is allocated e Supplies or CRUs are low CRU Solid Ink Sticks or other usable item needs attention see LUI e Paper jam is detected Paper jam is in need of attention in specified area if you have been notified c Ifyouhave created more than one group repeat this exercise for each group Enter the number of seconds that you want to set the jam timer for release of status to selected groups e Select Apply to save your settings or Undo to cancel Local UI Alerts You can con
346. to features that can be tracked for accounting and regulatory requirements Secure Access is also the key to the personalized experience at the device e Xerox Scan to PC This solution bridges the gap between documents PDFs and paper helping you to personalize your Xerox workflow scanning and PDF workflow It also gives you the ability to customize directly from your desktop the scanning menus available to you on your Xerox EIP enabled device This makes it easy to securely scan from the device to specific folders on your workstation Other software such Omtool Equitrac and FreeFlow SMARTsend are available which enables users to access document repositories at the device display screen Additional resources may be required on the device depending on the solution For further information contact your Xerox Sales Representative System Administrator Guide 9 1 Extensible Services Setup ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the device is fully functioning on the network Ensure your XEIP solution is installed and functioning To enable EIP applications an InstallCustomServices dlm has to be installed on the device Ensure SSL is enabled on the device For further information refer to the Digital Certificate Management topic in this System Administrator s Guide At your Workstatio
347. to the Server Fax Defaults screen At the Device 7 Select the Fax button from the touch screen then touch OK 8 Enter a valid fax number Press Add then Close 9 Load a document in the document handler and press the green start button 10 Verify that your fax is received at the specified fax device Configure a Fax Repository using HTTP HTTPS Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure that web services are installed on the server where you want to store scanned images Examples of web servers include Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS and Apache Note the IP address or host name of the server e For HTTPS ensure that your web server is installed with a secure certificate e Create a user account and password for the device When a document is scanned the device logs in using the account transfers the file to the server or workstation and logs out Note the user account and password details e Create a directory on the HTTP HTTPS server to be used as a scan filing location repository Note the directory path e Note any script that is required to be run At your Workstation 1 Openthe web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter System Administrator Guide 23 5 Server Fax ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 19 00 cWL OY Un Tv 9 NO o 11 12
348. to validate users listed in the Local User Information Database This option requires you to configure accounts in the Local User Information Database Select Remotely on the Network to validate users via an Authentication Server This option requires you to have a server that will provide authentication of user login details Authentication via Kerberos Solaris Windows 2000 2003 SMB Windows NT4 2000 or LDAP is supported 21 2 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Xerox Secure Access Select Xerox Secure Access to allow users to be authenticated and authorized before they can access specific services or areas Xerox Secure Access provides a means of authenticating users via an authentication server and optional card reader Select CAC PIV Common Access Card Personal Identity Verification solution brings an advanced level of security to sensitive information Organizations can restrict access to the walk up features of a Xerox device This ensures only authorized users are able to copy scan e mail and fax information The key benefit of this solution is its two factor identification requirement Users must insert their access card and enter a unique Personal Identification Number PIN at the device This provides added security in the event that a card is lost or stolen Once validated a user is logged into the Xerox device for all walk up features The system allows for functions to be tracked for an added
349. tor User Name default is 1111 touch Next enter the Password default is 1111 touch Enter touch the Tools tab and touch User Interface Settings Touch Service Enablements then Server Fax set the service to Enable and touch Save Reboot the device with the Power On Off button For instructions on use of the Power On Off button click the Previous Menu button at the top of this page then click the button labelled Power On Off Button Verify that the Server Fax settings have been properly configured on the device by printing a Configuration Report At the Device 1 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close en egg m5 System Administrator Guide 24 7 Troubleshooting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 View the Server Fax Setup details Verify that the Protocol is correct and that the Server Name and Path to the Fax repository settings are properly configured Are the Server Fax Settings Correctly Configured Configure the Server Fax settings before continuing For instructions refer to Server Fax on page 23 1 Check the Third Party Fax Server Configuration 1 Atthe fax server disable the service so that it does not try to collect new faxes from the fax filing repository This will depend on the particular product but often the relevant service can be stopped Refer to the manufacturer s instructions conta
350. trator Guide 20 3 Network Accounting ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 9 10 11 12 13 Enter a name to define the preset for example Accounting Click OK Ensure the Accounting preset is selected in the Presets menu each time you print Click Print Enter your Network Accounting information Click OK to print the document Test Network Accounting 1 Open an application and print a job Verify that you are presented with the User ID and Accounting ID screen Enter a valid User and Accounting ID and click OK If you selected Save Accounting Codes it will only be necessary to enter this information the first time the driver is used If your print job does not print try to copy a job at the device using the same Account and User ID If the copy job completes then the Account and User ID are valid It may be necessary to check the network accounting solution software or server configuration to verify the User ID and Account ID Distribute the printer drivers with the Network Accounting option already selected if possible If the printer drivers are distributed without the option enabled workstation users will need to configure the drivers If the drivers are not properly configured jobs sent to the device will be deleted 20 4 System Administrator Guide Xerox Secure Access Administrators can configure the device so that users must be authenticated and authorized before they can access specific services or areas
351. ts Xerox ColorQube Series These models have copying printing scanning and faxing capabilities The devices supports scanning too and has the capability of storing print copy and scan files on the device It copies and prints at 30 40 50 pages per minute depending on the model A Document Feeder Bypass Tray and Paper Trays 1 2 and 3 are supplied as standard eo o 0 IT T M 1 ColorQube 9202 ColorQube 9203 Digital Copying Standard Standard Standard Network Printing Standard Standard Standard Scanning Standard Standard Standard E mail Standard Standard Standard Fax Option Option Option Paper Tray 1 2 3 Standard Standard Standard High Capacity Feeder Option Option Option Offset Catch Tray Option Option Option 80 GB Hard Drive Standard Standard USB Thumb Drive Standard Standard Standard Low Capacity Stapler Stacker LCSS Option Option Option High Volume Finisher HVF Option Option Option HVF with Booklet Maker Post Option Option Option Processor amp Trifolder System Administrator Guide 1 1 Introduction ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 ColorQube 9201 ColorQube 9202 ColorQube 9203 Foreign Device Interface Option Option Option Related Information Sources Information available for this product series consists of e The System Administrator Guide this guide e The Quick Use Guide e The Interactive User Guide e The Advanced User Guide e Th
352. ty card near the reader or entering a user ID or PIN personal identification number 2 If the device requests further information such as accounting details enter this information at the user interface 3 The device will confirm successful authentication allowing access to previously locked system features 7 18 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Authentication 4 When finished using system features press the Clear All button on the device s keypad to close your account System Administrator Guide 7 19 Authentication ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 7 20 System Administrator Guide Security This chapter describes how to configure the following Security features for the device e User Data Encryption on page 8 1 e User Information Database on page 8 2 e IP Filtering on page 8 4 e Audit Log on page 8 5 e Machine Digital Certificate Management on page 8 9 e IP Sec on page 8 12 e Trusted Certificate Authorities on page 8 16 e Immediate Image Overwrite on page 8 17 e OnDemand Overwrite on page 8 19 e PostScript R Passwords on page 8 23 Security Xerox For the latest information on securely installing setting up and operating your device see the Xerox Security Information website located at www xerox com security User Data Encryption User Data Encryption ensures that any scan print user or job sensitive data that resides on the device is secure User Data Encryption is automatically enabl
353. ult password before proceeding to any authentication configuration settings 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button System Administrator Guide 8 3 Security ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Click on the Security link Select Admin Password in the directory tree Ensure New Password tab is highlighted on the top of the screen Enter detail in the New Password and Retype New Password fields Click on the Apply button 1O 0 cL OY Un Note The user name admin is reserved for the Device System Administrator Account Do NOT use the username admin for any local or network accounts on the device Reset Policy This page allows you to enable or disable the Password Reset Policy 1 At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Security link Select Admin Password in the directory tree Ensure Reset Policy tab is highlighted on the top of the screen o0 I gv Ut e om In the Password Reset Policy select either e Enable Password Reset
354. users when configured as the method of Authentication e To authorize users to gain access to device features when configured as the method of Authorization For instructions on how to configure Authentication and Authorization see Authentication on page 7 1 Information Checklist Before starting the installation procedure please ensure the following items are available or have been performed e Ensure the E mail feature is functional on the device and your network supports LDAP services e Obtain the IP Address of your LDAP Server The device may also need a login name and password if the LDAP server is not configured to allow NULL names and passwords e Use an LDAP client to validate your settings before inputting them into the Internet Services menus LDAP clients include Microsoft Outlook Express Microsoft Outlook and Netscape Communicator gt Touse host names DNS must be configured on the device At your Workstation Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select LDAP in the directory tree In Server Information area select either the IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name radio button and enter the IP Address and Port or the Host Name a
355. vailable click Default All to see if they set to 9101 and 9102 respectively emulating HP JetDirect EX Plus 3 10 Leave the Bidirectional checkboxes and Maximum Connections settings at their default values oO 4 gt N 11 Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job indicator 12 Leave the PDL Switching Enabled box at its default value 13 Click on the Apply button to accept the changes 14 Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the machine 15 Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree 16 Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the machine The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time Installing CUPS on the UNIX workstation The instructions for installing and building CUPS are contained in the CUPS Software Administrators Manual written and copyrighted by Easy Software Products and available for downloading at www cups org documentation php System Administrator Guide 5 35 Network Installation ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 An Overview of the Common UNIX Printing System Version 1 1 and a large amount of other descriptive documentation is also available at this site The binary
356. verwrites the Default Repository and Template Pool scan settings If certain applications will use Default Repository settings not matching SMARTsend settings reconfigure the applications to use an Alternate Repository before configuring the device with SMARTsend s Add Update feature Enter a name for the filing destination template in the Friendly Name box Select SMB from the Protocol drop down menu Select either the IPv4 Address or Host Name radio button Enter the IPv4 Address and Port or Host Name and Port of the computer where the scan filing repository SMB server or workstation is located Enter the Share Name in the Share box Enter the Document Path as it relates to the share where the scan filing repository is located in the Document Path box For example If the path is sharename wc scans enter wc scans Select a radio button for Login Credentials to Access the Destination Select Authenticated User to have your Authentication Server determine user access to the file server Select Prompt at User Interface to have the file server determine user access Select System to have the system directly log in to the file server Supply a Login Name and Password if the system will be directly accessing the file server Click on the Save button to accept the changes Configure General Settings 18 19 20 21 22 23 Select General in the directory tree To print a Confirmation She
357. w to configure TCP IP and HTTP refer to Configure Protocols with Internet Services on page 2 9 e Obtain the IP Address of a functional SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol mail server that accepts inbound mail traffic e Ensure that DNS settings are configured on the device e Obtain the IP Address account and password details of a POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 Mail Server e Create an e mail account which the device will use as the Internet Fax From address e Testthe e mail account by sending an e mail from a networked workstation running SMTP and POP3 clients After sending the e mail log in to the POP3 server to verify receipt of same Enable Internet Fax Print a Configuration Report to verify that Internet Fax is an Installed Option 1 Press the Machine Status button Touch the Machine Information tab Touch Information Pages Touch Configuration Report Touch Print then touch Close UT gEe pos 3 Configure a Domain Name and SMTP Address Note A domain name must be entered to enable configuration of the Internet Fax feature To Configure a Domain Name 1 Atyour Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter 2 Click on the Properties tab 3 If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 4 Click on the Login button 5 Click on the Connectivity link 6 Click on the Protocols li
358. web browser to access Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services CentreWare Internet Services is the embedded HTTP server application that resides in the device Internet Services allows Administrators to change network and system settings on the device from the convenience of their desktops Many of the features available within Internet Services will require an Administrator User Name and Password The default User Name is admin and the default Password is 1111 A user will only be prompted for an Administrator s User Name and Password once in a single browser session System Configuration To use CentreWare Internet Services you need to enable both TCP IP and HTTP on the device See How to Add or Change a Static IP Address when there is no DHCP Server Available on page 2 9 Access Internet Services To view the Internet Services Welcome screen 1 Enter the device s IP Address in the web browser 2 Press Enter or click on the Go button For example Address http 192 113 21 25 2 6 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Device Connection The Welcome screen will display Header Panel 45 WORKCENTRE Status Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qe 6 e eje Search v Favorites amp mur ee Ti Description amp Alerts Billing Information sspe cO ers Welcome to your new WorkCentre You will have received seve
359. y emulating HP JetDirect EX Plus 3 Leave the Bidirectional checkboxes and Maximum Connections settings at their default values 11 Set the End of Job Timeout to the number of seconds to wait before processing a job without an End Of Job indicator Leave the PDL Switching Enabled checkbox at its default value Click on the Apply button to accept the changes or Undo to return the settings to their previous values or Default AII to enter printer defaults for all settings recommended Click on the OK button when you see the window that says Properties have been successfully modified Note The settings are not applied until you restart the device Click on the Status tab select Description amp Alerts in the directory tree Click the Reboot Machine button and click OK to reboot the device The network controller takes approximately 5 minutes to reboot and network connectivity will be unavailable during this time Configure SLP Configure SLP if needed to support CUPS Mac OS and NetWare 1 Qo oY Ui IT w At your Workstation open the web browser and enter the IP address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the Connectivity link Click on the Protocols link Select SLP in the directory tree Check the
360. y reset TCP IP addressing including DHCP and DNS settings and enable HTTP as follows 1 Go to the device and press the Log In Out gt button to enter the Tools pathway 2 Enterthe Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter the Password 1111 then touch Enter Tip This password can be changed by following the steps provided in the Administrator Tools topic in the General Setup section of this guide System Administrator Guide 2 5 Device Connection ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 3 Press the Machine Status button and then the Tools tab 4 Wait for the screen to refresh touch Network Settings touch Advanced if a warning message appears touch Continue 5 Touch the HTTP Settings button touch Enable touch Save then touch Close to return to the Network Setting screen 6 Touch TCP IP Settings 7 Configure TCP IP settings including DHCP Dynamic Addressing and DNS touch Save touch the Close button to return to the Network Setting screen Note This device supports IPv6 addressing with an automatically built Link Local Address for broadcasting to routers that can supply the network layer configuration parameters See Configure Protocols with Internet Services on page 2 9 Quick Setup When your device is configured with an IP address and HTTP is enabled you can configure network information from your web browser via Internet Services Enter the IP address of the device in your
361. y ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Entry Data This column contains any additional data that is recorded for an Audit Log entry for example e Machine name gt Jobname e Username e Accounting Account ID when Network Accounting is enabled 8 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Security Machine Digital Certificate Management Machine Digital Certificates provide keys for encryption decryption of data it ensures the data is not tampered with and to validate the source of data A Digital Certificate is like an Electronic Driver s Licence It contains the following e Name of whom the Certificate is Issued to Serial Number e Expiration Date e Name of the Certificate Authority that Issued the Certificate e A Public Key e A Digital Signature of the Key from a Certificate Authority e Country Code Other optional information it can contain is e State Province Name e Locality Name Organization Name e Organization Unit e E mail Address The device can be configured for secure access with the SSL Secure Socket Layer protocol via Digital Certificates The enablement of SSL provides encryption for all workflows where the device is used as a HTTPS server Workflows include e Administration of the device via Internet Services e Printing via Internet Services e Printing via IPP e Scan Template Management e Workflow Scanning via HTTPS e Administration of Network Accountin
362. y making a photocopy at the device Is the device functioning Resolve any mechanical issues before attempting to use Embedded Fax For assistance and support refer to the www xerox com website Note Server Fax and Embedded Fax are mutually exclusive services If one is enabled the other will not function Perform the steps immediately below to check which service is enabled 24 8 System Administrator Guide ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Troubleshooting Ensure Embedded Fax is Installed Correctly At the Device Press the Log In Out button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press Machine Status then the Tools tab Touch Service Settings Touch Embedded Fax Settings This should read Enable If this is not Enabled or the Fax Install screen appears refer to the instructions to configure Embedded Fax in this guide qe NE I Ensure the Fax Settings are Correctly Configured Ensure the device has been configured with the correct fax telephone number At the Device 1 Press the Log In Out button to enter the Tools pathway Enter the Administrator s User Name admin touch Next enter Password 1111 touch Enter Press Machine Status then the Tools tab Touch Service Settings o m Touch Fax Service Settings Verify that all Fax Setting configuration steps have been performed Refer
363. your device this will have an extension of dlm dynamically loaded module from the www xerox com website or from your Xerox Customer Support Representative e Download the upgrade file to a local or network drive You will be able to delete the file after the upgrade procedure e TCP IP and HTTP protocols must be enabled on the device so that the device web browser can be accessed At your Workstation Open the web browser and enter the IP Address of the device in the Address bar and press Enter Click on the Properties tab If prompted enter the Administrator User ID and Password The default is admin and 1111 Click on the Login button Click on the General Setup link Click on the Machine Software link Click on the Upgrades in the directory tree Check to enable Upgrades box Click on the Apply button MO 00 ow OY Ua dE MANI System Administrator Guide 22 3 Software Upgrade ColorQube 9201 9202 9203 Set 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 The proc Serv the Auto Upgrade Time Click on the Auto Upgrade in the directory tree Check the Enabled box to enable the Schedule Upgrade feature Select either Hourly or Daily to activate the feature accordingly in the Refresh Start Time section If Daily has been selected enter the required time for the upgrade to be performed For Protocol select either IPv4 Address IPv6 Address or Host Name Enter the IP Address and
364. your primary LDAP server is connected to additional servers select LDAP Referrals to include searches at the other servers Under the Perform Query on heading select Surname and Given Name Fields to search for the user s last name surname and first name given name Alternatively if you select Mapped Name Field you can click on User Mappings specify the base DN in Search Directory Root enter a known common name in the Enter Name box then click Search The returned information for each attribute configurable under Imported Heading will be shown in the column labelled Sample Click on the Apply button when done Set Authentication to control access to individual Services 26 27 28 Click on Setup in the directory link under Access Rights to display Authentication Configuration page in the Current Configuration area click on the View button for Service Registration On the Service Registration screen check the box to select the services you want to display on the machine touch interface Click on the Save button and return to the Authentication Configuration Set Authentication to control access to individual Features 29 30 31 32 33 Select Tools amp Feature Access in the directory tree under Access Right In the Tools amp Feature Access page under Presets select either Standard Access Only Lock Tools Open Access Unlock All Tools and Features Custom Acce

Kidde 1276CA Smoke Alarm User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents